Sie sind auf Seite 1von 236

IONOS-NMS P5

METERING

Installation and User Guide

253 153 970-05

May 2011 Issue 05

LIST OF CHANGES

(A new edition replaces all previous versions)

Date

Change description

Page

253 153 970-05

October 2008

Creation of original user guide for


version P5.3

All pages

April 2009

Modifications for version P5.4

All pages

May 2011

Modifications for version P5.5

All pages

3 000 322 860 000 03


253 153 970-05
3 000 322 860 000 04
253 153 970-05
3 000 322 860 000 05

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


Page 2/236
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited

WARNING
SAGEMCOM follows all the technical evolutions assiduously and continuously seeks the improvement of its
products so as to make some profit fully its customers.
Consequently, it thus assumes the right to make evolve without notice its documentation.

ENVIRONMENT
Preservation of the environment as part of a sustainable development logic is an essential concern of
SAGEMCOM.
The desire of SAGEMCOM is to operate systems observing the environment and consequently it has decided
to integrate environmental performances in the life cycle of its products, from manufacturing to commissioning,
use and elimination.

PACKING :
The presence of the logo (green dot) means that a contribution is paid to an approved
national organisation to improve packaging recovery and recycling infrastructures.
To facilitate recycling, please respect the sorting rules set up locally for this kind of
waste

BATTERIES :
If your product contains batteries, they must be disposed of at appropriate collection points.

THE PRODUCT :
The crossed-out waste bin stuck on the product (or on its accessories) means that the product
belongs to the family of electrical and electronic equipment.
In this respect, the European regulations ask you to dispose of it selectively :
At sales points in the event of the purchase of similar equipment.
At the collection points made available to you locally (drop-off centre, selective
collection, etc.).

In this way you can participate in the re-use and upgrading of Electrical and Electronic
Equipment Waste, which can have an effect on the environment and human health.

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
Page 3/236

TABLE OF CONTENTS
METERING ..........................................................................................................................................................................1
LIST OF FIGURES .............................................................................................................................................................9
LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS ............................................................................................................................................13
TYPOGRAPHICAL CONVENTIONS.............................................................................................................................14
GLOSSARY .......................................................................................................................................................................15
1. SYSTEM INSTALLATION AND MANAGEMENT...................................................................................................16
1.1 - GENERAL INFORMATION ..........................................................................................................................................16
1.1.1 - IONOS-NMS ..................................................................................................................................................16
1.1.2 - Architecture....................................................................................................................................................17
1.1.2.1 - General architecture .................................................................................................................................................17
1.1.2.2 - Software architecture ...............................................................................................................................................18

1.1.3 - Workstations ..................................................................................................................................................18


1.1.4 - Man-Machine Interface (MMI) .....................................................................................................................18
1.2 - INSTALLING THE CD WITH W INDOWS .....................................................................................................................19
1.2.1 - To install the Server + Client Applications ................................................................................................19
1.2.1.1 - To install the Server Application (with Client) .......................................................................................................19
1.2.1.2 - To install the Client Application...............................................................................................................................21
1.2.1.3 - To install the Proxy Application...............................................................................................................................22
1.2.1.4 - To install the NMSperftool Application...................................................................................................................23

1.2.2 - To install LCT application for equipment (FMX, Sagem-Link, FSP2000, FSP3000, ADR155E) ......23
1.2.2.1 - To install LCT application for equipment of type FMX, Sagem-Link, FSP2000, FSP3000 ............................23
1.2.2.2 - To install LCT application for equipment ADR155E.............................................................................................24

1.2.3 - Available configurations on Server IONOS-NMS.....................................................................................25


1.2.3.1 - To configure TFTP server........................................................................................................................................25
1.2.3.2 - To configure IP address of the server seen by the equipment...........................................................................25
1.2.3.3 - To configure the backup directories .......................................................................................................................25
1.2.3.4 - To configure the HTTP Proxy Function .................................................................................................................26
1.2.3.5 - To configure the function Traps Forward...............................................................................................................26
1.2.3.6 - To configure the parameters associated with the collection of performance ...................................................26
1.2.3.7 - To authorize the data entry of the accents and the special characters in the "Name" of the equipment .....28
1.2.3.8 - To inhibit control on the name of cross-connections in the audit of the equipment.........................................28
1.2.3.9 - To configure the time interval between IONOS-NMS and equipment...............................................................29
1.2.3.10 - To configure the performance parameters used by equipment .......................................................................29
1.2.3.11 - To configure the IONOS-NMS server name .......................................................................................................29
1.2.3.12 - To configure the send of mail on alarm change .................................................................................................29
1.2.3.13 - To configure the timers used for the send of mail..............................................................................................30
1.2.3.14 - To configure the send of mail on critical alarm..................................................................................................30
1.2.3.15 - To configure the send of mail on a system alarm...........................................................................................31
1.2.3.16 - To configure the send of mail on a specific event type .....................................................................................31
1.2.3.17 - To send a mail in relation to one sub-network, NE type and NE name ..........................................................32
1.2.3.18 - To configure the format of the sent mail..............................................................................................................33
1.2.3.19 - To configure a timer for the send of mails...........................................................................................................33
1.2.3.20 - To configure the feature of trails supervised in real time ..................................................................................33
1.2.3.21 - To allow the duplication of IP address .................................................................................................................34
1.2.3.22 - To configure the duration of the inactivity period and the number of attempts authorised before locking a
user.............................................................................................................................................................................................34
1.2.3.23 - To activate the CORBA interface TMF814..........................................................................................................34
1.2.3.24 - To configure the scheduled task for Standby trail..............................................................................................35
1.2.3.25 - To configure the Ldap connection ........................................................................................................................36
1.2.3.26 - To configure SSH protocol ....................................................................................................................................37
1.2.3.27 - To configure the alarm multi-criteria filtering.......................................................................................................38
1.2.3.28 - To manage the inaccessibility status of the FOT155A by a trap......................................................................39
1.2.3.29 - To configure parameters for the ADR10000.......................................................................................................39
1.2.3.30 - To configure ssh protocol with EMS-ADR (ADR10000)....................................................................................40
IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05
Page 4/236
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited

1.2.3.31 - ADR10000 includes STM or data cards with electrical interfaces ...................................................................41
1.2.3.32 - To configure the number of Client sessions to the server.................................................................................41
1.2.3.33 - To configure the number of Client sessions per PC Client...............................................................................42
1.2.3.34 - To configure the SNMP trap generator................................................................................................................42
1.2.3.35 - Configuration file to display the long name of the trail(s) in relation to its alarm pk ......................................44
1.2.3.36 - To run the getTrailLongNames script...................................................................................................................45
1.2.3.37 - To configure the FMX backup configuration file.................................................................................................45
1.2.3.38 - To configure the user rights to perform actions from the Federator application ............................................46

1.2.4 - Available configurations on Client IONOS-NMS ......................................................................................47


1.2.4.1 - To configure the help on line...................................................................................................................................47
1.2.4.2 - To configure Internet Explorer to use HTTP Browser on the equipment of type ADR....................................47
1.2.4.3 - To configure Internet Explorer to use HTTP Proxy ..............................................................................................48
1.2.4.4 - To inhibit the data entry of spaces in the M1400 name of the equipment ........................................................48
1.2.4.5 - To activate the data entry of upercase in the M1400 name and longname......................................................48
1.2.4.6 - To configure the automatic deconnection of client after inactivity period .........................................................49
1.2.4.7 - To configure the number of NEs for which a warning message is displayed in NML View............................49
1.2.4.8 - To deactivate the automatic routing of trails/bearer SDH ...................................................................................49
1.2.4.9 - To configure the use of Proxy for SLF-v1 and SLF-N..........................................................................................50
1.2.4.10 - To configure the use of Proxy for SLF-H.............................................................................................................50
1.2.4.11 - To configure the use of client without an alarm window....................................................................................50
1.2.4.12 - To display the ADR10000 Proxy menu ...............................................................................................................50
1.2.4.13 - To configure the launching of the Equipment View (ADR10000) ....................................................................50

1.2.5 - The Application Easy Launcher under Windows .....................................................................................51


1.2.6 - To start the Server Application with Windows ..........................................................................................52
1.2.6.1 - To start the Server with Easy Launcher.................................................................................................................52
1.2.6.2 - To start the server without Easy Launcher............................................................................................................52

1.2.7 - To start the Client Application with Windows............................................................................................53


1.2.7.1 - To configure the time difference between client and server ...............................................................................54

1.2.8 - To close the Server Application with Windows.........................................................................................54


1.2.8.1 - To close the Server with Easy Launcher ...............................................................................................................54
1.2.8.2 - To close the Server without Easy Launcher. ........................................................................................................54

1.2.9 - To close the Client Application ...................................................................................................................54


1.2.10 - To start the HTTP Proxy Application with Windows ..............................................................................54
1.2.11 - To close the HTTP Proxy Application with Windows ............................................................................55
1.2.12 - To start the Proxy Application for SLF-v1 and SLF-N ...........................................................................55
1.2.13 - To close the Proxy Application for SLF-v1 and SLF-N .........................................................................56
1.2.14 - To start the Proxy Application for SLF-H under Windows ....................................................................56
1.2.15 - To close the Proxy Application for SLF-H ...............................................................................................56
1.3 - TO INSTALL THE CD FOR SOLARIS .........................................................................................................................57
1.3.1 - To install the Server and Client Applications ............................................................................................57
1.3.1.1 - To install the Server Application with Solaris ........................................................................................................57
1.3.1.2 - To install the Client Application with Windows......................................................................................................57
1.3.1.3 - To install the HTTP Proxy Application with Solaris ..............................................................................................57

1.3.2 - To install LCT application for equipment (FMX, Sagem-Link, FSP2000, FSP3000, ADR155E) ......58
1.3.3 - Available configurations on Server IONOS-NMS.....................................................................................58
1.3.4 - Available configurations on Client IONOS-NMS ......................................................................................58
1.3.5 - To start the Server Application with Solaris ..............................................................................................58
1.3.6 - To start the Client Application with Windows............................................................................................58
1.3.7 - To close the Server Application with Solaris.............................................................................................58
1.3.8 - To close the Client Application with Windows ..........................................................................................58
1.3.9 - To start the Proxy Applications with Solaris..............................................................................................58
1.3.10 - To stop the Proxy Application with Solaris..............................................................................................59
1.3.11 - To restart a SUN station with Solaris.......................................................................................................59
1.3.12 - To restart the Oracle database and the IONOS-NMS server with Solaris .........................................59
1.4 - TO INSTALL THE IONOS FEDERATOR ......................................................................................................................59
1.4.1 - To install the Client Application of IONOS-NMS ......................................................................................59
1.4.2 - To modify the configuration file...................................................................................................................59
1.4.3 - To start the Ionos Federator........................................................................................................................60
1.4.4 - To close the Ionos Federator ......................................................................................................................61
1.5 - DATABASE MANAGEMENT .......................................................................................................................................61
1.5.1 - To backup the database ..............................................................................................................................61
1.5.1.1 - Backup on line from the client application .............................................................................................................61
1.5.1.2 - Backup on line from a script with Solaris...............................................................................................................62
1.5.1.3 - To configure a Periodic backup off line with Solaris......................................................................................62
1.5.1.4 - Copy of backup directories on magnetic tape with Solaris ................................................................................62

1.5.2 - To restore the database...............................................................................................................................63


IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
Page 5/236

1.5.2.1 - To restore of a backup with Windows ...................................................................................................................63


1.5.2.2 - List of available backup with Solaris ......................................................................................................................63
1.5.2.3 - Restore of a backup with Solaris ............................................................................................................................63
1.5.2.4 - Restore of backup directories copied on magnetic tape with Solaris ................................................................63

1.5.3 - To migrate a database .................................................................................................................................64


1.5.3.1 - Migration of a database with Windows. .................................................................................................................64
1.5.3.2 - Migration of a database with Solaris. .....................................................................................................................65

1.5.4 - Database Management (Split & Merge) ....................................................................................................65


1.5.4.1 - To split a IONOS-NMS database............................................................................................................................66
1.5.4.2 - Split with Solaris........................................................................................................................................................66
1.5.4.3 - Split with Windows....................................................................................................................................................67
1.5.4.4 - To merge two IONOS-NMS databases .................................................................................................................67
1.5.4.5 - Merge with Solaris ....................................................................................................................................................68
1.5.4.6 - Merge with Windows ................................................................................................................................................68

1.5.5 - Updating the traps managers table of NEs after a merge or a split ......................................................68
1.6 - EMS-ADR DATABASE MANAGEMENT (ADR 10000) .............................................................................................69
1.6.1 - To backup the EMS-ADR database ...........................................................................................................69
1.6.2 - To restore the EMS-ADR database in R7.2..............................................................................................69
1.6.3 - To restore the EMS-ADR database in R8.1..............................................................................................70
1.7 - TO SAVE THE EQUIPMENT DATABASES (EXCEPT METERING)..................................................................................72
1.8 - TO EXPORT EQUIPMENT INVENTORY IN A FILE XML .................................................................................................72
1.9 - TO EXPORT EQUIPMENT INVENTORY IN A FILE TXT .................................................................................................73
1.10 - TO EXPORT DETAILED EQUIPMENT INVENTORY IN A FILE TXT ..............................................................................73
1.11 - ALARMS RESYNCHRONIZATION OF IONOS-NMS FOR THE SERVER NETCOOL ..............................................74
1.12 - TO RUN THE FORCE POLLING SCRIPT ..................................................................................................................74
1.13 - TO RUN THE ALIGN-NES SCRIPT...........................................................................................................................74
2. TOPOLOGY MANAGEMENT ....................................................................................................................................76
2.1 - INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................................................................76
2.2 - TOPOLOGY VIEW WINDOW .....................................................................................................................................76
2.3 - SUB-NETWORK ADMINISTRATION ............................................................................................................................78
2.3.1 - To create a sub-network ..............................................................................................................................78
2.3.2 - To display/modify the properties of a sub-network ..................................................................................80
2.3.3 - To move a sub-network ...............................................................................................................................82
2.3.4 - To delete a sub-network ..............................................................................................................................83
2.3.5 - To rename a sub-network............................................................................................................................83
2.3.6 - To change the sub-network background image .......................................................................................83
2.3.7 - To delete the sub-network background image .........................................................................................83
2.4 - ADMINISTRATION OF NETWORK ELEMENTS (NE, VNE) .........................................................................................84
2.4.1 - To create a network element.......................................................................................................................84
2.4.2 - To copy a network element (NE, VNE)......................................................................................................90
2.4.3 - To move a network element (NE, VNE) ....................................................................................................90
2.4.4 - To delete a network element (NE, VNE) ...................................................................................................90
2.4.5 - To rename a network element (NE, VNE).................................................................................................91
2.4.6 - To display and modify the properties of a network element ...................................................................91
2.4.7 - To modify the M1400 name of a network element (NE, VNE) ...............................................................93
2.4.8 - To audit a network element (NE)................................................................................................................96
2.4.9 - To reapplicate the general parameters in a network element (NMS to NE) ......................................105
2.4.10 - To align the capacity parameters from a network element (NE to NMS) .........................................107
2.4.11 - To perform an inventory alignment for a network element (NE)........................................................108
2.4.12 - To display and modify the configuration of an equipment ..................................................................110
2.4.13 - To display and modify the SNMP parameters......................................................................................112
2.4.14 - To Back up the database of a network element...................................................................................113
2.4.15 - To restore the database of a network element.....................................................................................115
2.4.16 - To restore the database of ADR10000..................................................................................................116
2.4.17 - To update the software on a network element .....................................................................................117
2.4.18 - To Export the configuration of a network element ...............................................................................121
2.4.19 - To visualize the counters of performance for SLF-v1, Sagem-Link, SLF-N and SLF-H equipment
...................................................................................................................................................................................122
2.4.19.1 - To Visualize the graphs of performance collect ...............................................................................................122
2.4.19.2 - To export the collects of performance ...............................................................................................................124

2.4.20 - EMS API Integration.................................................................................................................................124


2.4.21 - To discover NE from Network (IP discovery) .......................................................................................127
2.4.22 - To seek an equipment using its name or of its address IP.................................................................130
IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05
Page 6/236
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited

2.5 - ADMINISTRATION OF METERING ELEMENTS (XP3000)........................................................................................132


2.5.1 - To create a network element (XP3000)...................................................................................................132
2.5.2 - To delete a network element.....................................................................................................................136
2.5.3 - To backup and visualize the data from a Data Concentrator (XP3000) .............................................137
2.5.4 - To launch the equipment view of a Data Concentrator (XP3000) .......................................................138
2.5.5 - To poll the accessibility of an equipment (XP3000)...............................................................................139
2.5.6 - To audit a network element (XP3000) .....................................................................................................140
2.5.7 - To reapply the general parameters in an XP3000 (NMS to NE) .........................................................141
2.5.8 - To realign the list of meters .......................................................................................................................143
2.5.9 - To Update the software on a NE element ( Data Concentrator ).........................................................144
2.5.10 - To Update the software on a NE element ( List of Meters ) ...............................................................147
2.5.11 - State Control of Meter Download ...........................................................................................................149
3. NML VIEW ...................................................................................................................................................................151
3.1 - INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................................................................................151
3.2 - NML VIEW WINDOW ..............................................................................................................................................151
3.2.1 - To display / filter a list of objects...............................................................................................................153
3.2.2 - List of objects in search area ....................................................................................................................155
3.2.3 - Data Concentrators ....................................................................................................................................155
3.2.4 - Meters...........................................................................................................................................................156
3.2.5 - To set the Meter delivery point..................................................................................................................158
3.2.6 - Meters load curve .......................................................................................................................................159
3.2.7 - Meter actions ...............................................................................................................................................162
3.2.7.1 - Start an action on a meter. ....................................................................................................................................162
3.2.7.2 - Status of an action ................................................................................................................................................163
3.2.7.3 - Result of an action ................................................................................................................................................164

3.2.8 - Tracking of multiple meter actions............................................................................................................165


3.2.9 - Data concentrator Task..............................................................................................................................166
3.2.10 - Security management between data concentrator and meters. ........................................................168
3.2.10.1 - Initialisation............................................................................................................................................................168
3.2.10.2 - Modifications in the NML view due to ciphering ...............................................................................................168
3.2.10.3 - Ciphering meter actions.......................................................................................................................................169
3.2.10.4 - One meter discover in ciphering mode..............................................................................................................169
3.2.10.5 - Meter move from one DC to another. ................................................................................................................169
3.2.10.6 - Start of ciphering specific meter actions. .........................................................................................................170
3.2.10.7 - Modifications of ciphering mode after first installation.....................................................................................170

3.2.11 - User rights management for metering features. ..................................................................................171


4. METER ACTIONS ......................................................................................................................................................172
4.1 - THE IONOS SYSTEM INFORMATION.......................................................................................................................172
4.2 - IONOSSI : STARTING AND CONFIGURING ..............................................................................................................172
4.3 - IONOSSI : SENDING COMMANDS ...........................................................................................................................173
4.4 - IONOSSI : STARTING AND CONFIGURING ..............................................................................................................175
5. ALARMS MANAGEMENT........................................................................................................................................176
5.1 - INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................................................................................176
5.2 - MANAGEMENT OF CURRENT ALARMS....................................................................................................................177
5.2.1 - To display the current alarms....................................................................................................................177
5.2.2 - To acknowledge a current alarm ..............................................................................................................179
5.2.3 - To unacknowledge a current alarm..........................................................................................................179
5.2.4 - To filter current alarms by criteria .............................................................................................................179
5.2.5 - To locate a current alarm...........................................................................................................................181
5.2.6 - To display the properties of a current alarm ...........................................................................................181
5.2.7 - To display the alarms unacknowledged cleared alarms .......................................................................182
5.2.8 - To display the new alarms.........................................................................................................................183
5.2.9 - To filter current alarms by multi-criteria ...................................................................................................184
5.2.10 - To activate the send of mails on alarms modification .........................................................................186
5.2.11 - To activate the send of mails on critical alarm .....................................................................................187
6. HISTORIES MANAGEMENT ...................................................................................................................................189
7. PREFERENCES MANAGEMENT ...........................................................................................................................193
7.1 - INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................................................................................193
IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
Page 7/236

7.2 - PREFERENCES ......................................................................................................................................................193


7.2.1 - To change the IP address of the server ..................................................................................................193
7.2.2 - To change an icon image ..........................................................................................................................194
7.2.3 - To change the default properties of the Nes...........................................................................................195
7.2.4 - To change the default properties of sounds ...........................................................................................196
8. USERS MANAGEMENT ...........................................................................................................................................198
8.1 - INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................................................................................198
8.2 - ADMIN VIEW WINDOW............................................................................................................................................198
8.2.1 - To create a profile .......................................................................................................................................200
8.2.2 - To create a group........................................................................................................................................202
8.2.3 - To create a user ..........................................................................................................................................204
8.2.4 - To display/modify the properties of a profile ...........................................................................................205
8.2.5 - To display/modify the properties of a group............................................................................................207
8.2.6 - To display/modify the properties of a user ..............................................................................................209
8.2.7 - To copy a profile..........................................................................................................................................211
8.2.8 - To copy a group ..........................................................................................................................................212
8.2.9 - To copy a user.............................................................................................................................................213
8.2.10 - To delete a profile .....................................................................................................................................215
8.2.11 - To delete a group......................................................................................................................................215
8.2.12 - To delete a user ........................................................................................................................................215
8.2.13 - To lock a user............................................................................................................................................215
8.2.14 - To unlock a user .......................................................................................................................................216
9. IONOS SERVERS FEDERATOR ............................................................................................................................218
9.1 - INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................................................................................218
9.2 - DESCRIPTION OF IONOS SERVERS FEDERATOR ..................................................................................................218
9.2.1 - The map of Federator.................................................................................................................................218
9.2.2 - To visualize the alarms of a server ..........................................................................................................219
9.2.3 - To filter current alarms of a server by criteria .........................................................................................220
9.2.4 - To open a IONOS-NMS Client on a server.............................................................................................222
9.2.5 - To open a IONOS-NMS Client on a server with another user .............................................................222
9.2.6 - To force the connection of a server not connected................................................................................223
9.2.7 - To force the refresh of the map ................................................................................................................223
9.2.8 - To start a server ..........................................................................................................................................223
9.2.9 - To stop a server ..........................................................................................................................................223
9.2.10 - To backup the database of a server ......................................................................................................223
9.2.11 - To Restore the database on a server ....................................................................................................224
9.2.12 - To Change a server..................................................................................................................................224
9.2.13 - Backup 1+1 of IONOS NMS servers (Option)......................................................................................224
9.2.13.1 - Introduction............................................................................................................................................................224
9.2.13.2 - Procedure of backup ............................................................................................................................................225

APPENDIX - SPECIAL FUNCTIONS UPON OBJECTS ........................................................................................228


APPENDIX EXAMPLE OF SPLIT/MERGE SCENARIO.......................................................................................231
APPENDIX EXAMPLE OF SNMP TRAP GENERATOR CONFIGURATION ...................................................234

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


Page 8/236
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited

LIST OF FIGURES
FIGURE 1.1 : GENERAL ARCHITECTURE OF IONOS-NMS.................................................................................................17
FIGURE 1.2 : IONOS-NMS SOFTWARE PLATFORM ...........................................................................................................18
FIGURE 1.3 : W INDOW - IONOS SOLUTIONS SERVER DIAGNOSTIC.................................................................................19
FIGURE 1.4 : W INDOW - IONOS SOLUTIONS CLIENT DIAGNOSTIC ..................................................................................21
FIGURE 1.5 : W INDOW - NMSPERFTOOL SCHEDULED TASK...........................................................................................23
FIGURE 1.6 : EASY LAUNCHER (1).......................................................................................................................................51
FIGURE 1.7 : EASY LAUNCHER (2).......................................................................................................................................51
FIGURE 1.8 : EASY LAUNCHER (3).......................................................................................................................................52
FIGURE 1.9 : W INDOW - START IONOS-NMS SERVER .......................................................................................................52
FIGURE 1.10 : DOS COMMANDS WINDOW ..........................................................................................................................53
FIGURE 1.11 : W INDOW - CONNECT TO WHICH NAME SERVER .........................................................................................53
FIGURE 1.12 : LOGIN W INDOW ...........................................................................................................................................53
FIGURE 1.13 : W INDOW HTTP PROXY APPLICATION .....................................................................................................55
FIGURE 1.14 : W INDOW SLF-V1 SLF-N PROXY APPLICATION .........................................................................................56
FIGURE 1.15 : W INDOW SLF-H PROXY APPLICATION ....................................................................................................56
FIGURE 1.16 : FORCE BACKUP W INDOW ............................................................................................................................61
FIGURE 1.17 : BACKUP /DATABASE W INDOW .....................................................................................................................62
FIGURE 2.1 : TOPOLOGY MAIN VIEW ..................................................................................................................................76
FIGURE 2.2 : W INDOW CREATE SUB-NETWORK (1).........................................................................................................78
FIGURE 2.3 : W INDOW CREATE SUB-NETWORK (2).........................................................................................................79
FIGURE 2.4 : W INDOW CREATE SUB-NETWORK (3).........................................................................................................79
FIGURE 2.5 : W INDOW SUB-NETWORK PROPERTIES / GENERAL ....................................................................................80
FIGURE 2.6 : W INDOW SUB-NETWORK PROPERTIES / ADDITIONAL INFORMATION .........................................................81
FIGURE 2.7 : W INDOW SUB-NETWORK PROPERTIES / ALARMS ......................................................................................82
FIGURE 2.8 : W INDOW OPEN ...........................................................................................................................................83
FIGURE 2.9 : W INDOW CREATE A NETWORK ELEMENT (1)..............................................................................................84
FIGURE 2.10 : W INDOW CREATE NE / SECONDARY IP ADDRESS).................................................................................85
FIGURE 2.11 : W INDOW CREATE A NETWORK ELEMENT (2) ...........................................................................................85
FIGURE 2.12 : W INDOW CREATE A NETWORK ELEMENT (3) ...........................................................................................86
FIGURE 2.13 : W INDOW CREATE A NETWORK ELEMENT (4) ...........................................................................................87
FIGURE 2.14 : W INDOW CREATE A NETWORK ELEMENT (5) ...........................................................................................88
FIGURE 2.15 : W INDOW CREATE A NETWORK ELEMENT (6) ...........................................................................................89
FIGURE 2.16 : W INDOW NETWORK ELEMENT PROPERTIES ...............................................................................................91
FIGURE 2.17 : W INDOW NETWORK ELEMENT PROPERTIES / ALARMS ...............................................................................92
FIGURE 2.18 : W INDOW NETWORK ELEMENT PROPERTIES ...............................................................................................93
FIGURE 2.19 : W INDOW RENAME NE M1400 NAME (1) ....................................................................................................93
FIGURE 2.20 : W INDOW RENAME NE M1400 NAME (2) ....................................................................................................94
FIGURE 2.21 : W INDOW RENAME NE M1400 NAME (3) ....................................................................................................94
FIGURE 2.22 : W INDOW RENAME NE M1400 NAME (4) ....................................................................................................94
FIGURE 2.23 : W INDOW RENAME NE M1400 NAME (5) ....................................................................................................94
FIGURE 2.24 : W INDOW RENAME NE M1400 NAME (6) ....................................................................................................95
FIGURE 2.25 : W INDOW RENAME NE M1400 NAME (7) ....................................................................................................95
FIGURE 2.26 : W INDOW AUDIT RESULTS / GENERAL .........................................................................................................98
FIGURE 2.27 : W INDOW AUDIT RESULTS / INVENTORY / CARDS .......................................................................................98
FIGURE 2.28 : W INDOW AUDIT RESULTS / INVENTORY / MSPS ........................................................................................99
FIGURE 2.29 : W INDOW AUDIT RESULTS / CROSS-CONNECTIONS ....................................................................................99
FIGURE 2.30 : W INDOW AUDIT RESULTS / BRIDGING POINTS ..........................................................................................100
FIGURE 2.31 : W INDOW AUDIT RESULTS / VCGROUPS ...................................................................................................100
FIGURE 2.32 : W INDOW AUDIT RESULTS / MONITORING .................................................................................................101
FIGURE 2.33 : W INDOW AUDIT RESULTS / ETH/VCG PORTS .........................................................................................101
FIGURE 2.34 : W INDOW AUDIT RESULTS / MEPIDS ........................................................................................................102
FIGURE 2.35 : W INDOW AUDIT RESULTS / CONTINUITY-CHECK PROBES ........................................................................102
FIGURE 2.36 : W INDOW AUDIT RESULTS / SDH PORTS ..................................................................................................103
FIGURE 2.37 : W INDOW AUDIT RESULTS / MS-SPRING ................................................................................................103
FIGURE 2.38 : W INDOW AUDIT RESULTS / MS-SPRING / DETAIL ...................................................................................104
FIGURE 2.39 : W INDOW AUDIT RESULTS / FMX INVENTORY ...........................................................................................105
FIGURE 2.40 : W INDOW AUDIT / GENERAL REAPPLICATION ...........................................................................................106
IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
Page 9/236

FIGURE 2.41 : W INDOW GENERAL PARAMETERS REAPPLICATION RESULTS..................................................................106


FIGURE 2.42 : W INDOW GENERAL PARAMETERS REAPPLICATION RESULTS/DETAILS ...................................................107
FIGURE 2.43 : W INDOW AUDIT / CAPACITY PARAMETERS ALIGNMENT ...........................................................................107
FIGURE 2.44 : W INDOW GENERAL CAPABILITY PARAMETERS ALIGNMENT RESULTS ......................................................108
FIGURE 2.45 : W INDOW AUDIT / INVENTORY ALIGNMENT ...............................................................................................109
FIGURE 2.46 : W INDOW INVENTORY ALIGNMENT RESULTS .............................................................................................109
FIGURE 2.47 : W INDOW SAGEM-LINK EQUIPMENT VIEW .............................................................................................111
FIGURE 2.48 : W INDOW SAGEM-LINK LIGHT EQUIPMENT VIEW .................................................................................111
FIGURE 2.49 : W INDOW SLF-A EQUIPMENT VIEW ...........................................................................................................111
FIGURE 2.50 : W INDOW NETWORK ELEMENT PROPERTIES / FMX INVENTORY ..............................................................112
FIGURE 2.51 : EXAMPLE OF SNMP VIEW W INDOW .........................................................................................................113
FIGURE 2.52 : W INDOW NETWORK ELEMENT BACKUP RESULTS ....................................................................................113
FIGURE 2.53 : W INDOW NETWORK ELEMENT BACKUP FAILED RESULT........................................................................114
FIGURE 2.54 : W INDOW CRITICAL FMX BACKUP MISSING ALARM IN FAULT VIEW .......................................................115
FIGURE 2.55 : W INDOW W ARNING CONFIGURATION CHANGED ALARM IN FAULT VIEW ..............................................115
FIGURE 2.56 : W INDOW NETWORK ELEMENT RESTORATION ..........................................................................................115
FIGURE 2.57 : W INDOW NETWORK ELEMENT RESTORATION RESULTS ..........................................................................116
FIGURE 2.58 : W INDOW SOFTWARE MANAGEMENT WINDOW ..........................................................................................117
FIGURE 2.59 : W INDOW SOFTWARE MANAGEMENT WINDOW / INVENTORY ....................................................................119
FIGURE 2.60 : W INDOW PERF VIEW ON SLF-V1..............................................................................................................122
FIGURE 2.61 : W INDOW PERF VIEW / NMSPERFTOOL ON SLF-V1.................................................................................123
FIGURE 2.62 : W INDOW PERF VIEW / NMSPERFTOOL ON SLF-H (ETHERNET COUNTERS) ..........................................124
FIGURE 2.63 : DISCOVER NETWORK ELEMENTS W INDOW ..............................................................................................127
FIGURE 2.64 : W INDOW DISCOVER NETWORK ELEMENTS/SEEDS ...............................................................................127
FIGURE 2.65 : W INDOW DISCOVER NETWORK ELEMENTS/COMMUNITIES ...................................................................128
FIGURE 2.66 : W INDOW DISCOVER NETWORK ELEMENTS/DISCOVERING ...................................................................128
FIGURE 2.67 : W INDOW DISCOVER NETWORK ELEMENTS/STATUS .............................................................................129
FIGURE 2.68 : W INDOW TOPOLOGY VIEW/TREE ............................................................................................................129
FIGURE 2.69 : W INDOW TOPOLOGY VIEW / SEARCH NE ..............................................................................................130
FIGURE 2.70 : W INDOW CREATE A NETWORK ELEMENT (1) .........................................................................................132
FIGURE 2.71 : W INDOW CREATE A NETWORK ELEMENT (2) .........................................................................................133
FIGURE 2.72 : W INDOW CREATE A NETWORK ELEMENT (3) .........................................................................................134
FIGURE 2.73 : W INDOW CREATE A NETWORK ELEMENT (4) .........................................................................................135
FIGURE 2.74 : W INDOW CREATE A NETWORK ELEMENT (5) .........................................................................................135
FIGURE 2.75 : W INDOW NETWORK ELEMENT BACKUP ....................................................................................................137
FIGURE 2.76 : W INDOW NETWORK ELEMENT BACKUP RESULTS ....................................................................................137
FIGURE 2.77 : W INDOW NETWORK ELEMENT BACKUP RESULTS ....................................................................................139
FIGURE 2.78 : W INDOW AUDIT RESULTS / GENERAL .......................................................................................................140
FIGURE 2.79 : W INDOW AUDIT RESULTS / METERS .........................................................................................................141
FIGURE 2.80 : W INDOW AUDIT / GENERAL REAPPLICATION ............................................................................................142
FIGURE 2.81 : W INDOW GENERAL PARAMETERS REAPPLICATION RESULTS..................................................................142
FIGURE 2.82 : W INDOW GENERAL PARAMETERS REAPPLICATION RESULTS/DETAILS ...................................................143
FIGURE 2.83: W INDOW SOFTWARE MANAGEMENT WINDOW ...........................................................................................144
FIGURE 2.84: W INDOW SOFTWARE MANAGEMENT WINDOW / INVENTORY .....................................................................145
FIGURE 2.85: SELECTION OF A METER LIST TO BE UPDATED. ..........................................................................................147
FIGURE 2.86: METERS SOFTWARE MANAGEMENT WINDOW............................................................................................148
FIGURE 2.87: TASKS TAB FOR ONE DC WINDOW. ............................................................................................................149
FIGURE 2.88: DETAIL OF ONE UPDATE FIRMWARE TASK OF ONE DC. .............................................................................149
FIGURE 2.89: DETAIL OF ONE UPDATE FIRMWARE TASK IN THE NML VIEW LIST OF METERS..........................................149
FIGURE 2.90: DISPLAY OF THE REMAINING TIME PARAMETER..........................................................................................150
FIGURE 3.1 : NML VIEW: SEARCH AREA (1) .....................................................................................................................151
FIGURE 3.2 : NML VIEW: DETAILS AREA (2) .....................................................................................................................152
FIGURE 3.3 : NML VIEW / MAIN FILTER / METERS / FILTER .............................................................................................153
FIGURE 3.4 : NML VIEW / MAIN FILTER / TRAILS / FILTER / LIST CONFIGURATION .........................................................154
FIGURE 3.5: NML VIEW / MAIN FILTER / DATA CONCENTRATOR INFORMATIONS ............................................................155
FIGURE 3.6: GENERAL PROPERTIES OF ONE METER. .......................................................................................................156
FIGURE 3.7: NML VIEW / MAIN FILTER / METERS / SAVE AS ...........................................................................................157
FIGURE 3.8: NML VIEW / METER GENERAL INFORMATIONS.............................................................................................157
FIGURE 3.9: DELIVERY POINT UPDATE ..............................................................................................................................158
FIGURE 3.10: DELIVERY POINT UPDATE RESULT WINDOW ...............................................................................................158
FIGURE 3.11: FILLING TIME INTERVAL ...............................................................................................................................159
FIGURE 3.12: MINUTES LOAD CURVE FOR ONE METER ....................................................................................................160
IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05
Page 10/236
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited

FIGURE 3.13 : DAY LOAD CURVE FOR ONE METER ...........................................................................................................160


FIGURE 3.14 : CURVE DATA FOR ONE METER ..................................................................................................................161
FIGURE 3.15: DATA INFORMATION IN LOAD CURVE ..........................................................................................................161
FIGURE 3.16: FUNCTIONALITIES IN LOAD CURVE ..............................................................................................................162
FIGURE 3.17 : ACTIONS POP-UP .......................................................................................................................................163
FIGURE 3.18 : ACTION PARAMETERS WINDOW .................................................................................................................163
FIGURE 3.19 : ACTION TASK LOG WINDOW WITH RESULTS ..............................................................................................164
FIGURE 3.20 : CLEAR OR ABORT ONE TASK. ....................................................................................................................165
FIGURE 3.21 : RESULTS OF TASK VISIBLE IN GENERAL TAB. ...........................................................................................165
FIGURE 3.22 : START OF GLOBAL TASK MANAGEMENT. ..................................................................................................166
FIGURE 3.23 : GOBAL TASK MANAGEMENT WINDOW.......................................................................................................166
FIGURE 3.24 : TASK STATUS IN GOBAL TASK MANAGEMENT. ..........................................................................................166
FIGURE 3.25 : START OF RED CODE ENABLE. ................................................................................................................167
FIGURE 3.26 : CLEAR/ABORT OF ONE METER ACTION AT NE LEVEL. ..............................................................................167
FIGURE 3.27 : CIPHERING STATUS FIELD IN THE NML VIEW. .......................................................................................168
FIGURE 3.28 : MANUALLY START OF SECURITY ACTIONS.................................................................................................170
FIGURE 3.29 : START OF UPDATING OF CYPHERING INFORMATION. ................................................................................170
FIGURE 3.30 : METERING FEATURES USER RIGHTS MANAGEMENT..................................................................................171
FIGURE 4.1 IONOS SI DEMONSTRATOR ............................................................................................................................172
FIGURE 4.2 : IONOS SERVER IP ADDRESS ........................................................................................................................173
FIGURE 4.3 : DELIVERY POINT CREATION .........................................................................................................................173
FIGURE 4.4 : MODIFY THE PARAMETER VALUES ...............................................................................................................174
FIGURE 4.5 : GETTING RESULT OF ONE COMMAND...........................................................................................................175
FIGURE 5.1 : W INDOW TOPOLOGY VIEW / FAULT VIEW ...................................................................................................177
FIGURE 5.2 : W INDOW TOPOLOGY VIEW / FAULT VIEW / POP-UP MENU .........................................................................178
FIGURE 5.3 : W INDOW TOPOLOGY VIEW / FAULT VIEW / LIST CONFIGURATION..............................................................180
FIGURE 5.4 : W INDOW ALARMS PROPERTIES / INFORMATION..........................................................................................181
FIGURE 5.5 : W INDOW UNACKNOWLEDGED CLEARED AND NEW ALARMS .......................................................................182
FIGURE 5.6 : W INDOW UNACKNOWLEDGED CLEARED AND NEW ALARMS .......................................................................183
FIGURE 5.7 : W INDOW TOPOLOGY VIEW /FAULT VIEW / LIST CONFIGURATION / MULTI-CRITERIA FILTERING ...............185
FIGURE 6.1 : W INDOW LOG VIEW / EVENT LOG ...............................................................................................................190
FIGURE 6.2 : W INDOW LOG VIEW / FAULT LOG ................................................................................................................190
FIGURE 6.3 : W INDOW LOG VIEW / SERVER LOG .............................................................................................................191
FIGURE 6.4 : W INDOW LOG VIEW / DATABASE LOG .........................................................................................................191
FIGURE 6.5 : W INDOW LOG VIEW / SDH TRAILS LOG .....................................................................................................192
FIGURE 7.1 : W INDOW PREFERENCES / IONOS-NMS....................................................................................................193
FIGURE 7.2 : W INDOW PREFERENCES / TOPOLOGY VIEW ...............................................................................................194
FIGURE 7.3 : W INDOW PREFERENCES / NES....................................................................................................................195
FIGURE 7.4 : W INDOW PREFERENCES / SOUNDS.............................................................................................................196
FIGURE 8.1 : W INDOW ADMIN VIEW / RESEARCH TREE ...................................................................................................198
FIGURE 8.2 : W INDOW ADMIN VIEW / USERS ...................................................................................................................199
FIGURE 8.3 : W INDOW ADMIN VIEW / GROUPS ................................................................................................................199
FIGURE 8.4 : W INDOW ADMIN VIEW / PROFILES...............................................................................................................200
FIGURE 8.5 : W INDOW PROFILE CREATION (1).................................................................................................................200
FIGURE 8.6 : W INDOW PROFILE CREATION (2).................................................................................................................201
FIGURE 8.7 : W INDOW PROFILE CREATION (3).................................................................................................................201
FIGURE 8.8 : W INDOW TOPOLOGY VIEW / PROFILE PROVIDER ACCESS..........................................................................202
FIGURE 8.9 : W INDOW GROUP CREATION (1)...................................................................................................................203
FIGURE 8.10 : W INDOW GROUP CREATION (2) ................................................................................................................203
FIGURE 8.11 : W INDOW USER CREATION (1) FIGURE 8.12 : W INDOW LDAP USER CREATION (1) ..............................204
FIGURE 8.13 : W INDOW USER CREATION (2) ...................................................................................................................204
FIGURE 8.14 : W INDOW USER CREATION (3) ...................................................................................................................205
FIGURE 8.15 : W INDOW ADMIN VIEW / PROFILES / DEFINITION .......................................................................................206
FIGURE 8.16 : W INDOW ADMIN VIEW / PROFILES / AUTHORIZATION ...............................................................................206
FIGURE 8.17 : W INDOW ADMIN VIEW / GROUPS / DEFINITION ........................................................................................208
FIGURE 8.18 : W INDOW ADMIN VIEW / GROUPS / ADDITIONAL INFORMATION.................................................................208
FIGURE 8.19 : W INDOW ADMIN VIEW / USERS / DEFINITION............................................................................................209
FIGURE 8.20 : W INDOW ADMIN VIEW / LDAP USERS / DEFINITION ..................................................................................209
FIGURE 8.21 : W INDOW ADMIN VIEW / USERS / PASSWORD ...........................................................................................210
FIGURE 8.22 : W INDOW ADMIN VIEW / USERS / ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ...................................................................210
FIGURE 8.23 : W INDOW PROFILE CREATION (1)...............................................................................................................211
FIGURE 8.24 : W INDOW PROFILE CREATION (2)...............................................................................................................211
IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
Page 11/236

FIGURE 8.25 : W INDOW PROFILE CREATION (3)...............................................................................................................212


FIGURE 8.26 : W INDOW GROUP CREATION (1) ................................................................................................................212
FIGURE 8.27 : W INDOW GROUP CREATION (2) ................................................................................................................213
FIGURE 8.28 : W INDOW ADMIN VIEW / USERS / DEFINITION............................................................................................213
FIGURE 8.29 : W INDOW USER CREATION (1) ...................................................................................................................214
FIGURE 8.30 : W INDOW USER CREATION (2) ...................................................................................................................214
FIGURE 8.31 : W INDOW USER CREATION (3) ...................................................................................................................214
FIGURE 8.32 : W INDOW ADMIN VIEW / USERS / DEFINITION............................................................................................216
FIGURE 8.33 : W INDOW ADMIN VIEW / USERS / DEFINITION............................................................................................217
FIGURE 9.1 : W INDOW IONOS FEDERATOR.......................................................................................................................218
FIGURE 9.2 : W INDOW IONOS FEDERATOR / ALARMS ......................................................................................................219
FIGURE 9.3 : W INDOW IONOS FEDERATOR / ALARMS / LIST ............................................................................................220
FIGURE 9.4 : W INDOW IONOS FEDERAOR / LIST CONFIGURATION ...................................................................................221
FIGURE 9.5 : W INDOW IONOS FEDERATOR / LOGIN ON CLIENT .......................................................................................222

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


Page 12/236
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited

LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS

AU

Administrative Unit

BBE

Background Block Error (Bloc erron rsiduel)

CIR

Committed Information Rate

EML

Equipment Management Layer

EMS

Equipment Management System

ES

Errored Second

SES

Severely Errored Second

GUI

Graphic User Interface

MCP

Management Control Panel

MIB

Management Information Base

NE

Network Element

PDH

Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy

PIR

Peak Information Rate

QOS

Quality Of Service

SIA

Signal dIndication dAlarme

SNMP

Simple Network Management Protocol

TPI

Terminal Portable Intelligent

TU

Tributary Unit

TUG

Tributary Unit Group

UAP

Unavailable Period

UAS

Unavailable Second

VC

Virtual Container : VC-4, VC-3, VC-12

VNE

Virtual Network Element (not managed by NMS)

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
Page 13/236

TYPOGRAPHICAL CONVENTIONS
Window or screen.
Ex : Create a network element name of window or screen displayed
Screen access path from menu bar or pop-up menu.
Ex : Topology > New > NE sequence of functions selected from menu bar to display the
following screen

Create a Network Element / General


Network Element (NE), Sub-network, Tab or Function selected in explorer, in a window or in a menu.
Ex : General
Tab selected in window shown above
Text insertion or selection field.
Ex : Name
field forming part of window shown above
The modified fields are colored in green.
The fields where the input is not correct are colored in red.
Active button in a window.
Ex : [Apply]
Interactive button in the window shown above

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


Page 14/236
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited

GLOSSARY

Virtual network elements (VNE)


A network managed by the network manager is generally connected to another SDH network which is
either the network of another operator or the SDH equipment of another manufacturer managed by
another manager
The Virtual Network Elements (VNE) are used to represent the SDH equipment which is not managed
by the manager and to create links between the Network Elements and the Virtual Network Elements.

Alarm
An alarm is a fault detected on a network element (NE) : a severity degree (major, minor or non-alarm)
is associated to each alarm. This information is sent to the manager using the SNMP protocol.

Event
An event is an information item sent by the equipment using the SNMP protocol. Though there is no
event severity range, there are several types of events:


Protection event when connection occurs

Startup event when equipment is activated

Session event when user initiates a login or a logout

Maintenance event when a loop is created or cancelled

Loading event when downloading occurs

Change of attribute event (change of HTTP session)

Performance event

Console/Client/Server/User/Customer
Console :

refers to the user workstation.

Client :

refers to an application software run on the Console.

Server :

refers to the application software run on the main workstation.

User :
run

refers to the person working on the Console on which the Client application software is

Customer :

refers to the company using the service.

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
Page 15/236

1. SYSTEM INSTALLATION AND MANAGEMENT


1.1 - GENERAL INFORMATION
1.1.1 - IONOS-NMS
The IONOS-NMS system provides an efficient solution for management of a digital data transmission network
including:
- SAGEMCOM SDH equipment : ADR155C, ADR155CPE, ADR155E, ADR63E1, EXT155HA, ADR2500C,
ADR2500 EXTRA, ADR622, ADR10000, ADR10000HN, FOT155A, FOT155C
- SAGEMCOM PDH equipments : FMX, Sagem-Link, Sagem-Link 2, Sagem-Link Light, SLA, SLF-v1, SLFN, SLF-H, SLT, SLF-A
- SAGEMCOM WDM equipments : FSP2000 and FSP3000,
- SAGEMCOM DSLAM equipments : 4400, 4048, 4450 and 4900
- SAGEMCOM TV Num equipment : DTX and DTX2
- SAGEMCOM Data Concentrator : XP3000
IONOS-NMS offers EMS functions for all the SAGEMCOM equipments


Equipment configuration and alarm management

Cf Installation and user guide EMS management 253 153 959-05


IONOS-NMS offers NMS functions for the following SAGEMCOM equipments :ADR155C, ADR155CPE,
ADR155E, ADR63E1, EXT155HA, ADR2500C, ADR2500 EXTRA, ADR622, ADR10000HN, ADR10000,
FSP2000 and FSP3000


Configuration and management for links, bearers and trails

Alarm management for trails




Management of SDH protections: SNCP, MSP MS-SPRing (for ADR2500C, ADR2500 eXtra
and ADR10000HN only)
Management of DWDM protections : SNC optique

Cf Installation and user guide EMS/NMS management 253 153 897-05


IONOS-NMS offers EMS functions for all the SAGEMCOM Data Concentrators
Cf Installation and user guide Metering 253 153 941-05
IONOS-NMS provides a CORBA interface TMF814.
Different licences are proposed by SAGEMCOM to our customers :


Licence with EMS functions only

Licence with EMS and NMS functions

Licence with EMS and Metering functions

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


Page 16/236
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited

SYSTEM INSTALLATION AND MANAGEMENT

1.1.2 - Architecture
1.1.2.1 - General architecture
The general architecture is built on a client-server architecture: the various clients can be installed on several
physical machines connected to the same server.
The interface between the network element (NE equipment) and IONOS-NMS uses the SNMP V1 or SNMP N
protocol to send the alarm messages and to configure the end-to-end trails ( provisioning ).
This interface also uses the HTTP protocol to configure the equipment (NE integrating an on-card HTTP
server).
The management data are stored on the server.

Windows

CLIENT Plateform

IONOS-NMS
CLIENT
Generic functions

Internet
Explorer
run

Specific functions to
equipment

TFTP CLIENT

RMI, TCP

SERVER Plateform

HTTP
Windows or Solaris

IONOS-NMS
SERVER
SGBD

Topology
Alarms
Scurity
Performances

HTTP
PROXY

TFTP SERVER

SNMP, TFTP

HTTP

SAGEMCOM Equipment

SNMP
Agent

HTTP
Server

Figure 1.1 : General architecture of IONOS-NMS

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
Page 17/236

SYSTEM INSTALLATION AND MANAGEMENT


1.1.2.2 - Software architecture

IONOS-NMS is built on software modules implementing independent functional blocks developed in JAVA:
each block only processes a function subset of the complete software.
IONOS-NMS is based on the LUMOS software environment which supplies:


an SNMP interface.

base services on which the main functions of the network elements manager are based
(alarms, logs, etc.)

a Client application (MCP) based on use of Java Beans and providing the graphic interface
elements (topology, etc.)

The main application, developed by SAGEMCOM, integrates the network level functions.
The access to HTML pages for equipment of type ADR is done via a HTTP Proxy installed on the IONOSNMS Server.
IONOS NMS comprises the following modules:



The Client Application, which contains the functions for data presentation to the operator
(commonly called the client terminal).
The Server Application which implements the core functions.

The IONOS-NMS platform contains a Network element manager and a Network manager.

Network
Manager

Faults on
circuits

Configuration
of circuits
Security

Network
Element
Manager

Faults on NE

NE
configuration

NE
performances

Figure 1.2 : IONOS-NMS software platform

1.1.3 - Workstations
The Client Applications are run on a PC whereas the Server Application is run either on a PC or on a UNIX
platform. For small networks, the Client Application can be run on the same PC platform as the server, in
stand-alone mode.
The hardware platform thus remains flexible, open-ended and modular in terms of hard disk, RAM and
computing power in order to grow with the system, which entirely depends on the number of network elements
to be managed.

1.1.4 - Man-Machine Interface (MMI)


The Man-Machine interface of the administration software is similar to the Windows interface.


When the values of a field are limited, they can be selected in a drop-down box .

The current values are displayed in the fields which the user wishes to modify.

The mandatory fields are displayed with a different colour when their input is not supplied.

When an action is performed, there are two working modes:




If the action is short, the window closes during the operation: if an error occurs, a message is
displayed.

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


Page 18/236
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited

SYSTEM INSTALLATION AND MANAGEMENT




If the action is long (example: activation/deactivation of trail, audit, etc.), a waiting window is
displayed. When the action is completed, a window indicates the result or an error message.

1.2 - INSTALLING THE CD WITH WINDOWS


The IONOS-NMS software is supplied on a CD with a manual.
Two installations exist :


The installation of a server PC (with client)

The installation of a client PC

1.2.1 - To install the Server + Client Applications


The operating system and the database Oracle have been installed beforehand on the PC where the server
application is installed.
1.2.1.1 - To install the Server Application (with Client)
Caution: The installation of the Server Application must be carried out by a personnel qualified
Sagemcom.

 Insert CD on the PC used as server. A menu appears automatically. If it does not appear, double-to
click on the file "menu.vbs".
 Select the language ("English").
 Click on "Installation on a windows PC".
 Click on "Ionos-NMS 5.5 installation".
 Click on "Full (server with client)"
 Follow the installation instructions: choose a directory (Ionos-NMS by default).
 Click on [Quit].
A screen of diagnosis is displayed and gives the results of installation.

Figure 1.3 : Window - Ionos Solutions Server Diagnostic


IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
Page 19/236

SYSTEM INSTALLATION AND MANAGEMENT


Notes: It is possible to modify:
- the repertory used by default for backup of the database
(c:\temp\oracle.backup) (see 1.2.3.3 -)
- the repertory used by default for backup of the databases of equipment (IonosNMS\backup\equipment) (see 1.2.3.3 -)

To check that:
IP address of the server seen by the equipment corresponds to IP address of
the PC on which the server is installed (see 1.2.3.2 -)

To use a HTTP Proxy, see 1.2.4.3 -.


 Click on [Save configuration].
 Click on [Quit] to quit the installation.
At the end of the installation procedure, short cuts are available in menu Start :


Ionos-NMS 5.5 Client : Client Application (1).

Ionos-NMS 5.5 Server : Server Application.

TFTP : downloading software.

Ionos-NMS 5.5 (Easy Launcher) : used for Server starting.

Ionos-NMS 5.5 (Federator) : Federator Application (see 1.4 -)

 Copy the short cuts on the computer desktop (Drag and Drop of short cut of menu Start with the key
CTRL pressed)
Note: (1) The Client application is also installed on the same PC. It will be used only for the standalone configuration (Server + 1 Client on the same computer).

Modification of license file


 In the directory chosen for installation (Ionos-NMS by default), select the Config. folder.
 Copy the file LICENSE.DAT, provided with application.
Note: With a license "CORE", only the functions EMS are available.

Modification of database configuration file (for a no standard configuration)


 In the directory chosen for installation (Ionos-NMS by default), select the Config folder.
 In the folder, open the oracle_ext_assembly.xml file.
 In this file, update eventually the IP address of the database server (localhost), the database name
(DBNMS), the username (NMSserver) and the password (nmssmn).
<properties name="OracleJDBCManager">
<property name="database"
value="@(description=(address=(host=localhost)(protocol=tcp)(port=1521))
(connect_data=(sid=DBNMS)))"/>
<property name="username" value="NMSserver"/>
<property name="passwd" value="nmssmn"/>
<property name="drvtype" value="thin"/>
<property name="deadLockErrorCode" value="60"/>
</properties>

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


Page 20/236
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited

SYSTEM INSTALLATION AND MANAGEMENT


1.2.1.2 - To install the Client Application

 Insert CD on the PC used as Client. A menu appears automatically. If it does not appear, double-to
click on the file "menu.vbs".
 Select the language ("English").
 Click on "Installation on a windows PC".
 Click on "Ionos-NMS 5.5 installation".
 Click on "Client".
 Follow the installation instructions: choose a directory (Ionos-NMS by default).
 Click on [Quit].
A screen of diagnosis is displayed and gives the results of installation. The two parameters concerning the
proxy are not used (see 1.2.4.2 -).

Figure 1.4 : Window - Ionos Solutions Client Diagnostic


Note: To use a HTTP Proxy, see 1.2.4.3 -

 Click on [Save configuration]


 Click on [Quit] to quit the installation.
At the end of the installation procedure, short cuts are available in menu Start :


Ionos-NMS 5.5 (Client) : Client Application.

Ionos-NMS 5.5 (Federator) : Federator Application (see 1.4 -)

 Copy the short cut on the computer desktop (Drag and Drop of short cut of menu Start with the key
CTRL pressed).

Caution: In the case of an installation of the stand-alone configuration (the client is launched on the
PC server) to use menu "Installation of a server PC (with client).

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
Page 21/236

SYSTEM INSTALLATION AND MANAGEMENT


1.2.1.3 - To install the Proxy Application

 Insert CD on the PC used as Server. A menu appears automatically. If it does not appear, double-to
click on the file "menu.vbs".
 Select the language ("English")
 Click on "Installation of a server PC (with client)"
 Click on "Ionos HTTP Proxy 3.2 installation "
 Follow the installation instructions: choose a directory (Ionos HTTP Proxy by default).
 Click on "HTTP" to install an HTTP proxy only.
 Click on "SLF-v1 F-N" to install a proxy for equipment of type SLF-v1 and SLF-N.
 Click on "SLF-H" to install a proxy for equipment of type SLF-H
 Click on "Full" to install the two proxy : HTTP proxy and proxy for equipment of type SLF-v1 SLF-N,
and SLF-H.
 Click on [Quit].
 A screen of diagnosis is displayed and gives the results of installation. (see 1.2.1.1 -)
 Click on [Quit] to quit the installation.
At the end of the installation procedure, short cut are available in menu Start :


Ionos HTTP Proxy 3.2 : HTTP Proxy Application.

Start Ionos Proxy 3.2 (SLF-H) : to launch the Proxy Application for equipment of type SLF-H

Start Ionos Proxy 3.2 (SLF-v1 SLF-N) : to launch the Proxy Application for equipment of
type SLF-v1 and SLF-N.

Stop Ionos Proxy 3.2 (SLF-v1 SLF-N) : to stop the Proxy Applicationfor equipment of type
SLF-v1 and SLF-N.

 Copy the short cut on the computer desktop (Drag and Drop of short cut of menu Start with the key
CTRL pressed).
Caution: In the case of the use of HTTP Proxy, to guarantee the access security to the equipment, it
is possible to add IP address of the server with a habilitation "Supervisor" in each NE of type
ADR155C, ADR155CPE, ADR2500C, ADR2500 EXTRA, ADR622 or ADR63E1 which will be
managed by
IONOS-NMS. For that to use HTTP browser : Menu "Equipment/Management" to
add IP address of
the server in the table "List Managers" while clicking on "Supervisor". To
validate the modification with "Apply".

The HTTP Proxy is available with :


-

ADR155C P3.5 and > P3.5


ADR2500C P2.4 and > P2.4
ADR63E1 P2.0 and > P2.0
ADR2500 EXTRA
ADR155CPE
ADR 622

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


Page 22/236
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited

SYSTEM INSTALLATION AND MANAGEMENT


1.2.1.4 - To install the NMSperftool Application

The NMSPerftool allows to collect the performance counters on equipment of type Sagem-Link , SLF-v1, SLF-N
and SLF-H.
 Insert CD on the PC used as Server.
 Open the Folder "Install"
 Double-Click on "nmsperftool.exe"
 Confirm the installation directory.
 Wait several minutes: some windows are displayed, then closed.
 A scheduled task is automatically created and the next window is displayed, in case of password.
 Give the password.

Figure 1.5 : Window - NMSperftool Scheduled task


 The NMSperftool Application is installed.

1.2.2 - To install LCT application for equipment (FMX, Sagem-Link, FSP2000,


FSP3000, ADR155E)
The LCT application for FMX, Sagem-Link 2, SLF-v1, SLA, SLF-N, SLF-H, FSP2000, FSP3000, ADR155E is
used by the Client IONOS-NMS.
Notes: The LCT applications for equipment FOTC and Sagem-Link light are embedded. No particular
installation is needed
The LCT of the ADR10000HN and of the equipment ADR155c, ADR2500C, ADR2500 EXTRA,
ADR63E1, ADR155CPE are included in the equipment. No particular installation is needed
The LCT of equipment 3@Pack 4400, 3@Pack 4048, 3@Pack 4450 and 3@Pack 4900 are delivered
separately from IONOS-NMS application.
1.2.2.1 - To install LCT application for equipment of type FMX, Sagem-Link, FSP2000,
FSP3000

 Insert CD on the PC used as Client. A menu appears automatically. If it does not appear, double-to
click on the file "menu.vbs".
 Select the language ("English")
 Click on "Installation of a client PC"
 Click on "Optional TPI installation"
IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
Page 23/236

SYSTEM INSTALLATION AND MANAGEMENT

 Click on "TPI-FMX / FSP2000 / FSP3000 / Sagem-Link 2 / SLF-v1 / SLF-N / SLF-H / SLA installation "
 Follow the installation instructions
 Don't reboot immediately the PC.
A window of diagnosis gives the results of installation.
 Click on [Save configuration].
 Click on [Quit] to quit the installation.
 Reboot the PC.
1.2.2.2 - To install LCT application for equipment ADR155E

 Insert CD on the PC used as Server.


 Open the folder "Install/TPI/ADR155E".
 Double-click on "python-2-4.1.msi" to install the application "Python 2.4" in folder "C:\Python24".
 Unzip "pysnmp.zip" in folder "C:\Python24\lib\site-packages"
 Unzip "LCT-PC.zip" in folder "C:" (for example).
 Launch "FTP" Application of IONOS.
 In folder "LCT\nex", modify the file "Config.py" You must declare your FTP server 's root folder in this
file,
For instance :
ROOT = r'C:\Program Files\IONOS-NMS-4420\tftproot'
And modify if necessary the type of transfer selecting ftp :
TYPE = r'ftp'
 In folder LCT\snakelets, launch "serv.py" (or "python serv.py")

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


Page 24/236
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited

SYSTEM INSTALLATION AND MANAGEMENT


Note: The LCT of the 155E is using ftp server. Refer to 1.2.5 - The Application Easy Launcher
under Windows to know how to launch ftp server under Windows

1.2.3 - Available configurations on Server IONOS-NMS


1.2.3.1 - To configure TFTP server

 Launch the TFTP server.


 In the Settings, enter:
Timeout = 20 s ;
Base Directory = C:\Program Files\Ionos-NMS\tftproot (if Ionos-NMS chosen by default)
Note: This configuration is made automatically after the installation of the Server on PC.
It is imperative on the Unix server.
1.2.3.2 - To configure IP address of the server seen by the equipment

 In the directory chosen for the installation (by default Ionos-NMS), Select the Config folder.
 In the folder, open the file Server.xml
 Update the field "LocalServerAdress" so that it corresponds to IP address of the PC server seen by
the equipment.
This modification will be effective only after launching of Server IONOS-NMS.
Note: This configuration is made automatically after the installation of the Server on PC.
It is imperative on the Unix server.

1.2.3.3 - To configure the backup directories


Backup directory for the Server database

The backup files (backup of database Oracle) will be copied in the directory given in the File.xml file. The
directory by default can be modified :
 In the directory chosen for installation (Ionos-NMS by default), select the Config folder.
 In the folder, open the File.xml file
 In this file, update the field "oracle-backup-dat" path.
Note:This modifcation will be effective only after launching of Server IONOS-NMS.
The database back-up files are saved in directory "c:/temp/oracle.backup/AAAA/AAAA-MM/JJ" by
default.
Backup directory for the Equipment databases

The backup files (backup of equipment configuration) will be copied in the directory given in the File.xml file.
The directory by default can be modified :
 In the directory chosen for installation (Ionos-NMS by default), select the Config folder.
 In the folder, open the File.xml file
 In this file, update the field "equipement-backup-xxx" path (c:\Program Files\Ionos-NMS\backup\eqpt
by default)
Note: This modification will be effective only after launching of Server IONOS-NMS.
The NE database files are saved in directory "../IONOS-NMS/backup/eqpt/AAAA/AAAA-MM/JJ" by
default.
IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
Page 25/236

SYSTEM INSTALLATION AND MANAGEMENT

Caution: If the directory of the NE database has been modified, it is necessary to update the
equipmentbackup.xml file to be able to display the NE database list available and to restore it. The
directory by default can be modified :

 In the directory chosen for installation (Ionos-NMS by default), select the Config Folder.
 In the folder, open the equipmentbackup.xml file
 In this file, update the field "backup repository" so as to match to the specified directory that is
generally the same as the previously modified in the File.xml file.

1.2.3.4 - To configure the HTTP Proxy Function

 In the directory chosen for installation of Proxy (Ionos HTTP Proxy), select the Config. folder.
 In the folder, open the HttpProxy.cfg file
 After the tag [SERVER], insert a line which gives IP address of the server (x.x.x.x)
 After the tag [Allow], remove the line "x.x.x.x:x.x.x.x=OBSERVER".
Note: This configuration will be effective only after launching of Proxy Application.

Caution: the Proxy HTTP rejects all the addresses which are not true IP adress. (for example :
sagem.com will be rejected and an error message will be logged.)

1.2.3.5 - To configure the function Traps Forward

The function Traps Forward is installed on the Server IONOS-NMS.


By default, this function is not activated. The file "forward.xml" must be configured to activate the function.
 In the directory chosen for installation (Ionos-NMS by default), select the Config/Forward folder.
 In the folder, open the forward.xml file
 In this file, update the parameters of manager which will receive the traps : the IP address, the NE
type ((default, ADR2500C, ADR2500EXTRA, ADR10000HN, ADR155C, ADR155CPE,
ADR155C_P2_6, ADR63E1, ADR622, ADR155E, EXT155HAPHYSICAL, FOT155C, FOT155A,
FHLINK, FHLINKLIGHT, FHLINK_2, FHLINK-F, FHLINK-A, FHLINK_HC, FSP2000, FSP3000 FMX,
TRIPACK4048, TRIPACK4400, TRIPACK4450, TRIPACK4900) and the trap type (default, LogTrap,
ThresholdTrap, EquipstatusTrap) for the traps filtering.
<manager>
<ipAddress value="x.x.x.x"/>
<hostPort value="162"/>
<community value="public"/>
<neTrap neType="ADR2500C" trapType="default"/>
<neTrap neType="ADR155C" trapType="LogTrap"/>
</manager>
The traps can be forwarded to several managers.
Note: This modification will be effective only after launching of Server IONOS-NMS.
1.2.3.6 - To configure the parameters associated with the collection of performance

The file of configuration used for the collection of the points of performance is installed on the PC used as
Server IONOS-NMS.
IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05
Page 26/236
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited

SYSTEM INSTALLATION AND MANAGEMENT


 In the repertory chosen for the installation (by default Ionos-NMS), Select the Config/Perf folder.
 In this folder, Open the Config.xml file.
 Update the following parameters:
- the deadline between two collections for the counters 15mn - > by default 180min
- the deadline between two collections for the counters 24h - > by default 1320 min
- the deadline between two collections for the periods of unavailabilities associated with the
collection of the counters 15mn - > by default 600min
- the deadline between two collections for the periods of unavailabilities associated with the
collection of the counters 24h - > by default 1320min
- the deadline between two attempts in the event of failure with the first reading - > 15min
- the maximum number of points collected on 15min - > by defect 15000
- the maximum number of points collected on 24h - > by defect 18000
- the maximum number of the log for the points of collection 15mn - > by defect 10000
- the maximum number of remaining lines after automatic export for the log associated with the
points with collection 15mn - > by defect 4000
- the maximum number of the log for the points of collection 24h - > by defect 10000
- the maximum number of remaining lines after automatic export for the log associated with the
points with collection 24h - > by defect 4000
- the maximum number of the log for the periods of unavailability - > per defect 10000
- the maximum number of remaining lines after automatic export for the log associated with the
periods with unavailability - > by defect 4000
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
<config>
<!-- Collection start delay in minutes (after NE accessiblity event).
The idea is to let the NE handle re-synchronization requests before
(re-)starting to collect performance -->
<var name="InitDelay" type="java.lang.Integer" value="3"/>
<!-- 15mn counters collection period in minutes -->
<var name="15mnPeriod" type="java.lang.Integer" value="180"/>
<!-- 24h counters collection period in minutes -->
<var name="24hPeriod" type="java.lang.Integer" value="1320"/>
<!-- UAP short collection period in minutes -->
<var name="UAPShortPeriod" type="java.lang.Integer" value="600"/>
<!-- UAP long collection period in minutes -->
<var name="UAPLongPeriod" type="java.lang.Integer" value="1320"/>
<!-- Retry period in minutes (on collection failure) -->
<var name="RetryPeriod" type="java.lang.Integer" value="15"/>
<!-- Max concurent collection threads -->
<var name="MaxCollectionThreads" type="java.lang.Integer" value="3"/>
<!-- Max 15mn collection points -->
<var name="Max15mnCollectionPoints" type="java.lang.Integer" value="15000"/>
<!-- Max 24h collection points -->
<var name="Max24hCollectionPoints" type="java.lang.Integer" value="18000"/>
<!-- 15mn counter log maximum number of lines -->
<var name="15mnLogHighWaterMark" type="java.lang.Integer" value="10000"/>
<!-- 15mn counter log remaining lines after export -->
<var name="15mnLogLowWaterMark" type="java.lang.Integer" value="4000"/>
IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
Page 27/236

SYSTEM INSTALLATION AND MANAGEMENT


<!-- 24h counter log maximum number of lines -->
<var name="24hLogHighWaterMark" type="java.lang.Integer" value="10000"/>
<!-- 24h counter log remaining lines after export -->
<var name="24hLogLowWaterMark" type="java.lang.Integer" value="4000"/>
<!-- UAP log maximum number of lines -->
<var name="UAPLogHighWaterMark" type="java.lang.Integer" value="10000"/>
<!-- UAP log remaining lines after export -->
<var name="UAPLogLowWaterMark" type="java.lang.Integer" value="4000"/>
<!-- Log export file column separator -->
<var name="LogExportFileColumnSeparator" type="java.lang.String" value="&#09;"/>

</config>
Caution: The taking into account of the file modification will be effective only after launching of Server
IONOS-NMS.
1.2.3.7 - To authorize the data entry of the accents and the special characters in the
"Name" of the equipment

 In the repertory chosen for the installation (by default Ionos-NMS), select the Config folder.
 In this folder, open the file server-advanced.xml
 Replace the line:
<var name="DescendLongName" type="java.lang.Boolean" value="true"/>
by

<var name="DescendLongName" type="java.lang.Boolean" value="false"/>

Note: By default, the data entry of the accents and characters special in the "Name" of the
equipment are not authorized.
If the data entry of the accents and the special characters is authorized, the "Name" is not updated in
the equipment and control on this parameter (General tab) is not made in the Audit of NE
(see 2.4.8 -).
Caution: The taking into account of the file modification will be effective only after launching of Server
IONOS-NMS.
1.2.3.8 - To inhibit control on the name of cross-connections in the audit of the equipment

 In the repertory chosen for the installation (by default Ionos-NMS), select the Config folder.
 In this folder, open the file server-advanced.xml
 Replace the line:
by

<var name="MisalignOnXCNameDiff" type="java.lang.Boolean" value="true"/>


<var name="MisalignOnXCNameDiff" type="java.lang.Boolean" value="false"/>
Note: By default, control on the name of cross-connections in the audit of NE is done (see 2.4.8 -).
This function of suppression of the control of the name of cross-connections makes it possible to
manage equipment ADR2500C version < P2.4 (P1 or P2), ADR155E P2.1 and ADR10000HN P1.1 to
avoid the misalignment of NEs.
Caution: The taking into account of the file modification will be effective only after launching of Server
IONOS-NMS.

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


Page 28/236
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited

SYSTEM INSTALLATION AND MANAGEMENT


1.2.3.9 - To configure the time interval between IONOS-NMS and equipment

 In the repertory chosen for the installation (by default Ionos-NMS), select the Config folder.
 In this folder, open the file lfserver_ext_parameters.xml
 Modify the line (by default 60 seconds) :
<property name="DeltaMaximum" type="java.lang.Integer" value="60"/>
Note: When IONOS-NMS starts, The time set is done for all the NEs.
Then, the time set of a NE is done if the time interval between the date and time of NE and the date
and time of IONOS exceeds the defined value.
Caution: The taking into account of the file modification will be effective only after launching of Server
IONOS-NMS.
1.2.3.10 - To configure the performance parameters used by equipment

The parameters used by equipment for performance collect ( available for ADR155 P4.1 rev AF and
ADR2500 EXTRA P2.1) can be modify in a file xml.
 In the repertory chosen for the installation (by default Ionos-NMS), select the Config folder.
 In this folder, open the file server.xml
 Modify eventually the the following lines :
<var name="PerfThreshodTrapEnable" type="java.lang.Boolean" value="false"/>
The equipment will send threshold performance trap if it is set to "true"
<var name="PseudoTCMEnable" type="java.lang.Boolean" value="true"/>
Make it possible to synchronize the performances counter on NE time modulo 15 minutes
<var name="ToleranceDate" type="java.lang.Integer" value="30"/>
<var name="Start24hCountTime" type="java.lang.Integer" value="0"/>
Note: After the modification of this file and restart of server, launch an audit on each NE of type
ADR155 P4.1 rev AF or ADR2500 EXTRA P2.1 and realign the general parameters.
Caution: The taking into account of the file modification will be effective only after launching of Server
IONOS-NMS.
1.2.3.11 - To configure the IONOS-NMS server name

 In the repertory chosen for the installation (by default Ionos-NMS), select the Config folder.
 In this folder, open the file server.xml
 Modify the the following line :
<var name="NMSName" type="java.lang.String" value=""/>
Note: If no value is given for the NMSName (value by default), the name of IONOS-NMS server will be
the name of machine used as server.
Caution: The taking into account of the file modification will be effective only after launching of Server
IONOS-NMS.
1.2.3.12 - To configure the send of mail on alarm change

This procedure is used to configure the send of mail on alarm change (apparition, clear, acknowledgement,
unacknowledgement) (see 5.2.10 - Alarms management).
 In the repertory chosen for the installation (by default Ionos-NMS), select the Config/mail folder.
 In this folder, open the file emailParameters.xml
The send of mail is activated if :
<emailSender activate="yes" >
 Give if necessary the sender address (for example send@hotmail.com)
IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
Page 29/236

SYSTEM INSTALLATION AND MANAGEMENT


<SenderAdress>
<EmailAdress>
send@hotmail.com
</EmailAdress>
</SenderAdress>
 Give the address of destination (for example receive@hotmail.com)
<DestinationsAdresses>
<Receiver mail=short>
<EmailAdress>
receive@hotmail.com
</EmailAdress>
</Receiver>
Repeat several times this sequence (one sequence by address of destination)
It is possible to choose the format of the mail : short or complete
With the short format, you get only a summary of all alarms
 Give if you want a subject
<Subject>
NMSAlarms
</Subject>
If this item is present, you will get this text in the header of your message in your mail box. If
this item is not present, you will get a text with the severity of the alarm in the header of your
message in your mail box.
 Give the address and the port of mail server
<SmtpServer>
<IpAdress>
10.142.3.103
</IpAdress>
<Port>
25
</Port>
</SmtpServer>
 The taking into account of the file modification will be effective only after launching of Server IONOSNMS..

Caution: It's not possible to activate "critical alarm sending mail" and "report sending mail"
at the same time.

1.2.3.13 - To configure the timers used for the send of mail

The timers are used for the send of mail (see 5.2.10 -). A mail is sended after X minutes for an alarm change
( raised of alarm indeterminate/ warning/ minor/ major/ critical/ inaccessible, cleared, acknowledged,
unacknowledged).
 In the repertory chosen for the installation (by default Ionos-NMS), select the Config/mail folder.
 In this folder, open the file timers.xml
 Modify if necessary the values of timers.
Caution: The taking into account of the file modification will be effective only after launching of Server
IONOS-NMS.
1.2.3.14 - To configure the send of mail on critical alarm

This procedure is used to configure the send of mail on critical alarm appartion (see 5.2.11 -To activate the
send of mails on critical alarm).
First step : do the described actions of 1.2.3.12 -To configure the send of mail on alarm change
Second step :
IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05
Page 30/236
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited

SYSTEM INSTALLATION AND MANAGEMENT


 In the repertory chosen for the installation (by default Ionos-NMS), select the Config/mail folder.
 In this folder, open the file criticAlarmConfig.xml
To enable critical alarm mail for system alarm, change:
<systemt>
false
</systemt>
by
<systemt>
true
</systemt>
 Save and close the file criticAlarmConfig.xml
 The taking into account of the file modification will be effective only after launching of Server IONOSNMS.
Caution: It's not possible to activate "critical alarm sending mail" and "report sending mail"
at the same time.
1.2.3.15 - To configure the send of mail on a system alarm

This procedure is used to configure the send of mail on critical alarm appartion (see 5.2.11 -To activate the
send of mails on critical alarm).
First step : do the described actions of 1.2.3.12 -To configure the send of mail on alarm change
Second step :
 In the repertory chosen for the installation (by default Ionos-NMS), select the Config/mail folder.
 In this folder, open the file criticAlarmConfig.xml
To enable critical alarm mail for system alarm, change:
<systemt>
false
</systemt>
by
<systemt>
true
</systemt>
 Save and close the file criticAlarmConfig.xml
 The taking into account of the file modification will be effective only after launching of Server IONOSNMS.
Caution: It's not possible to activate "critical alarm sending mail" and "report sending mail"
at the same time.
1.2.3.16 - To configure the send of mail on a specific event type

This procedure is used to configure the send of mail on critical alarm appartion (see 5.2.11 -To activate the
send of mails on critical alarm).
First step : do the described actions of 1.2.3.12 -To configure the send of mail on alarm change
Second step :
 In the repertory chosen for the installation (by default Ionos-NMS), select the Config/mail folder.
 In this folder, open the file criticAlarmConfig.xml
To add an event type in the list to send a critical alarm mail, change or add:
<Except>
<Event_type>RadioLinkFailure</Event_type>
<Event_type>MODEM1:Modulation</Event_type>
<Event_type>ODU1:TxPower</Event_type>
</Except>
(This is only an example)
IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
Page 31/236

SYSTEM INSTALLATION AND MANAGEMENT


Caution The event type name in criticAlarmConfig.xml must be strickly identical to the one seen in the
current alarm window (or in the fault log)

 Save and close the file criticAlarmConfig.xml


 The taking into account of the file modification will be effective only after launching of Server IONOSNMS.
Caution: It's not possible to activate "critical alarm sending mail" and "report sending mail"
at the same time.
1.2.3.17 - To send a mail in relation to one sub-network, NE type and NE name

This procedure is used to configure the send of mail (in short mail format only) on critical alarm in relation to
one sub-network (recursively), NE type and NE name.

First step: do the described actions of 1.2.3.12 -To configure the send of mail on alarm change
Second step:

 In the repertory chosen for the installation (by default Ionos-NMS), select the Config/mail folder.
 In this folder, open the file emailParameters.xml
To enable the critical alarm mails sending for a sub-network, a NE type or a NE name, add or modify:
<ShortCriticalReceiver Subnetwork="Region Paris" NeType="SLF-H">
<EmailAdress>
receive1@hotmail.com
</EmailAdress>
</ShortCriticalReceiver>
<ShortCriticalReceiver NeType="SLF-N">
<EmailAdress>
receive2@hotmail.com
</EmailAdress>
</ShortCriticalReceiver>
<ShortCriticalReceiver NeName="Lyon">
<EmailAdress>
receive3@hotmail.com
</EmailAdress>

In this example, a mail will be sent on critical alarm to the receive1@hotmail.com receiver for all Network
Element type SLF-H belonging to the Region Paris sub-network (and each sub-network included into this
sub-network).
Also, a mail will be sent on critical alarm to the receive2@hotmail.com receiver for all Network Element type
SLF-N.
A mail will be only sent on critical alarm to the receive3@hotmail.com receiver for the Network Element with
the name Lyon.
 Save and close the file emailParameters.xml
Caution (1):

The name of sub-network must be unique.

The name of sub-network must not include some characters like >, <, &, , , etc ...

The tag NeType must be equal to the Equipment type name displayed in the combox box of the
Create a network element window or in the NE properties (Type field).

The tag NeName must be equal to the Network Element name displayed in the field Name of the
NE properties.

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


Page 32/236
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited

SYSTEM INSTALLATION AND MANAGEMENT


Caution (2): The taking into account of the file modification will be effective only after launching of Server
IONOS-NMS.
Note: If a Network Element is moved from one sub-network to another, it is not mandatory to restart the
IONOS-NMS server in order to get the mail to be send to the right receiver.
1.2.3.18 - To configure the format of the sent mail

This procedure is used to configure the format of the sent mail (the length of the message) in short mode on
critical alarm. (see 5.2.11 - To activate the send of mails on critical alarm)
 In the repertory chosen for the installation (by default Ionos-NMS), select the Config/mail folder.
 In this folder, open the file criticAlarmConfig.xml
 Modify if necessary these labels.
<object_short> Equipment: $EQUIPEMENT - Location: $LOCATION - Event type: $EVENT_TYPE - Begin
date: $BEGIN_DATE - End date: $END_DATE </object_short> (by default)
You can modify or remove the labels. (e.g. Equipment to Eqpt, or delete the word Equipment)
You can remove the label and its variable
If the variable exits, dont modify its value (e.g. $EVENT is not correct, must be $EVENT_TYPE)
 Save and close the file criticAlarmConfig.xml
Example:
<object_short> Eqpt: $EQUIPEMENT - $LOCATION - Evt: $EVENT_TYPE - Begin date: $BEGIN_DATE
</object_short>
Caution: The taking into account of the file modification will be effective only after launching of Server IONOSNMS.
1.2.3.19 - To configure a timer for the send of mails

This timer is used for the send of mail on critical alarm (see 1.2.3.12, refer to the main document: IonosNMS Installation and User Guide N 253 153 959-04 or 253 153 962-04).
A mail is sent after X seconds for an alarm change, if during this length of time a clear of this alarm was sent,
the sending of e-mail is cancelled
 In the repertory chosen for the installation (by default Ionos-NMS), select the Config/mail folder.
 In this folder, open the file criticAlarmConfig.xml
 Modify if necessary the value of this timer (in seconds), 0 is the value by default.
<Timer>30 </ Timer >
Caution: The taking into account of the file modification will be effective only after launching of Server IONOSNMS.
1.2.3.20 - To configure the feature of trails supervised in real time

This procedure is used to modify the number maximum of trails supervised in real time by user (2000 by
default) and the update frequency of the status for the trails supervised in real time.
 In the repertory chosen for the installation (by default Ionos-NMS), select the Config folder.
 In this folder, open the file server-advanced.xml
 Modify if necessary, to modify the number maximum of trails, the following line:
<var name="MaxRTS" type="java.lang.Integer" value="2000"/>
 Modify if necessary, to update the refresh frequency, the following line (value in ms):
<var name="RTSRefreshRate" type="java.lang.Integer" value="5000"/>
Caution: The taking into account of the file modification will be effective only after launching of Server
IONOS-NMS.
IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
Page 33/236

SYSTEM INSTALLATION AND MANAGEMENT


1.2.3.21 - To allow the duplication of IP address

This procedure is used to allow the duplication of IP address.


 In the repertory chosen for the installation (by default Ionos-NMS), select the Config folder.
 In this folder, open the file server-advanced.xml
 Modify if necessary the following line :
<var name="AcceptIpDuplicates" type="java.lang.Boolean" value="false"/>
by :
<var name="AcceptIpDuplicates" type="java.lang.Boolean" value="true"/>
Caution: The taking into account of the file modification will be effective only after launching of Server
IONOS-NMS.
The duplication of IP address is forbidden by default
In case of duplication, the following alarm is generated for each equipment: Duplicate address IP
1.2.3.22 - To configure the duration of the inactivity period and the number of attempts
authorised before locking a user

By default, the lock of user after a period of inactivity is not activated.


By default, the lock of user is performed after 5 wrong attempts
 In the repertory chosen for the installation (by default IONOS-NMS), select the Config folder.
 In this folder, open the file lfserver_ext_advanced.xml
 Replace the lines:
<properties name="SCFrameworkExtension">
<property name="lumos.scontainer.sec.SessTO" type="Long" value="-1"/>
</properties>
By:
<properties name="SCFrameworkExtension">
<property name="lumos.scontainer.sec.SessTO" type="Long" value="-1"/>
<property name="lumos.scontainer.sec.MaxUserInactivityPeriod" type="Long" value="60"/>
<property name="lumos.scontainer.sec.maxLoginAttempts" type="Integer" value="5"/>
</properties>
Notes: - "MaxUserInactivityPeriod" stands for the number of full days of inactivity before a user is
being locked.

- "maxLoginAttempts" stands for the number of attempts authorised before a user is being locked.
- User with admin profile and default users can't be locked.
- To unlock a user, refer to 8.2 - > Admin View window.
1.2.3.23 - To activate the CORBA interface TMF814

This procedure is used to activate the CORBA interface TMF814.


 Stop IONOS-NMS server
 In the repertory chosen for the installation (by default Ionos-NMS), select the Config folder.
 In this folder, save and open the file lfserver_ext_assembly.xml
 Modify the following line :
<!--<jar name="ext/e-stmf814.jar" />-->
by :
IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05
Page 34/236
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited

SYSTEM INSTALLATION AND MANAGEMENT


<jar name="ext/e-stmf814.jar" />
 Save and open the file lfserver_ext_parameters.xml
 Modify the following lines :
<!- <properties name="TMF814 Northbound">
<property name="lumos.leape.north.tmf.nameServiceUrl"
value="corbaloc::localhost:900/NameService" />
<property name="lumos.leape.north.tmf.lfUrl"
value="rmi://localhost:1099/srleap" />
</properties>
- ->
by :
<properties name="TMF814 Northbound">
<property name="lumos.leape.north.tmf.nameServiceUrl"
value="corbaloc::localhost:900/NameService" />
<property name="lumos.leape.north.tmf.lfUrl"
value="rmi://localhost:1099/srleap" />
</properties>
 Once the TMF814 northbound interface has been set up, two external applications are required to
launch the Ionos NMS Server:
- Corba name server
- Corba notification service
Caution: Once the TMF814 northbound interface has been set up, it will be no longer possible to launch
the NMS Server if Name server and Notifications server have not been launched will previously.

In the repertory chosen for the installation (by default Ionos-NMS), select the Bin folder.

 In this folder, execute the following scripts:


- start_TransientNameServer.bat (PC) or ./start_TransientNameServer.sh (solaris) (starts the
name server)
- start_NotificationService.bat (PC) or ./start_NotificationService.sh (solaris ) (starts the
notification service)
 IONOS-NMS server can be restarted.
Note: If you want to step back, you just have to replace the two modified files in the config directory by
their backup ones.
1.2.3.24 - To configure the scheduled task for Standby trail

This procedure is used to schedule a task for Standby trail


 In the repertory chosen for the installation (by default Ionos-NMS), select the Config folder.
 In this folder, open the file server_advanced.xml
<!-- Standby -->
<var name="LosEnabled" type="java.lang.Boolean" value="true"/>
<var name="AisEnabled" type="java.lang.Boolean" value="true"/>
<var name="StandbyLimitDelay" type="java.lang.Integer" value="720"/>
<var name="StandbyTaskTime" type="java.lang.String" value="05:00:00"/>
 Modify if needed the following line :
<var name="LosEnabled" type="java.lang.Boolean" value="true"/>
PPI-LOS alarms will be inverted
IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
Page 35/236

SYSTEM INSTALLATION AND MANAGEMENT


<var name="LosEnabled" type="java.lang.Boolean" value="false"/>
PPI-LOS alarms will not be inverted
<var name="AisEnabled" type="java.lang.Boolean" value="true"/>
PPI-AIS alarms will be inverted
<var name="AisEnabled" type="java.lang.Boolean" value="false"/>
PPI-AIS alarms will not be inverted
 Adjust the variable StandbyLimitDelay which unit is hour (default value is 720 equals 30 days)
<var name="StandbyLimitDelay" type="java.lang.Integer" value="720"/>
give the delay for an alarm to be present before to be inverted
 Adjust the variable StandbyTaskTime for the starting time of the scheduled task
 If you dont want this task to be run, then you should configure the server_advanced.xml file according
:
<var name="LosEnabled" type="java.lang.Boolean" value="false"/>
<var name="AisEnabled" type="java.lang.Boolean" value="false"/>
 Restart the IONOS-NMS server
Note : If you want log informations about this function in the server.log file or for manual actions about
Standby trail from the NML View, modify

 In the repertory chosen for the installation (by default Ionos-NMS), select the Config folder.
 In this folder, open the file ems_trace.properties
 Uncomment line log4j.category.com.sagem.ionos.nms.server.fault.priv.ext.standby=DEBUG to get
debug informations on the Standby trail activities. The debug infos are saved in file IonosNMS\log\app\server.log
 Idem for :log4j.category.com.sagem.ionos.nms.server.nml.priv.sec.SecNmlServiceImpl=DEBUG and
log4j.category.com.sagem.ionos.nms.server.nml.priv.impl.NmlServiceLocal=DEBUG about manual
activation
 Nota: this feature is designed for debug purposes only.
 Restart the IONOS-NMS server
1.2.3.25 - To configure the Ldap connection

This procedure is used to activate the LDAP connection:


 In the repertory chosen for the installation (by default Ionos-NMS), select the Config folder.
 In this folder, save and open the file server.xml
 Modify the following lines :
<var name="URL" type="java.lang.String" value=""/>
<var name="UserLogin" type="java.lang.String" value="admin"/>
<var name="UserPassword" type="java.lang.String" value="secret"/>
<var name="SecurityAuthentication" type="java.lang.String" value="simple"/>
<var name="Domain" type="java.lang.String" value=""/>
<var name="UserBase" type="java.lang.String" value="dc=sagem,dc=com"/-->
- URL: Type the string "ldap:// and set the IP address value with the IP address of the Ldap server and
the TCP port number (ie : ldap://192.168.75.75:389).
- UserLogin: Set this value with the name of a user registered in the Active Directory
- UserPassword: Set this value with the password of the UserLogin
- SecurityAuthentication should not be modified
This UserLogin/password is used to check the ldap connection.

 Save and close the file server.xml


IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05
Page 36/236
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited

SYSTEM INSTALLATION AND MANAGEMENT


 Restart the IONOS-NMS server
1.2.3.26 - To configure SSH protocol

This procedure is used to configure SSH server to replace FTP for BDD transferts with Backup 1+1 of
IONOS-NMS servers and TFTP for equipment software upgrade ( for transfert between IONOS-NMS Client
and IONOS-NMS server)
 In the directory chosen for the installation (by default Ionos-NMS), select the Config folder.
 In this folder, open the file server-advanced.xml
 Modify the following line
<!-- SFTP Status -->
<var name="SftpEnablead" type="java.lang.Boolean" value="false" />
 is replaced by :
<!-- SFTP Status -->
<var name="SftpEnablead" type="java.lang.Boolean" value="true" />
 Save and close the file server-advanced.xml
On UNIX server :
In the directory chosen for installation (Ionos-NMS by default), select the bin folder.

 Execute sftp_Install.sh (in order to create two users : "download" and "backup")
 PassWord for users "download" and "backup" is "$agem001"
 The default values can be changed (users and password)
 The last input is the path for the directory chosen for the installation (by default /tools/Ionos-NMS)
On Windows server :
In the directory chosen for installation (Ionos-NMS by default), select the bin. folder.
This command file installs the CopSSH application and sets CopSSH installation folder and IONOS-NMS.
It creates two users : "download" and "backup".

 Execute install_sftp.cmd (in order to create two users : "download" and "backup"
 PassWord for users "download" and "backup" is "$agem001"
The default values can be changed (users and password)
 Add environnement variable $CoppSHHInstall-Directoriy\bin in the system environnement variable :
PATH

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
Page 37/236

SYSTEM INSTALLATION AND MANAGEMENT

The CopSSH server is launched as a windows' service.


Note : If the default values of SFTP username and SFTP password of Software Upgrade are changed,
they must be changed in the server-advanced.xml file.

 In the directory chosen for the installation (by default Ionos-NMS), select the Config folder.
 In this folder, open the file server-advanced.xml
 open the file the server-advanced.xml file
 Modify the following line
<!-- SFTP server login -->
<var name="SFTPServerUserName" type="java.lang.String" value="download" />
<!-- SFTP server passwd -->
<var name="SFTPServerPwd" type="java.lang.String" value="$agem001" />
Note : If the default values of SFTP username and SFTP password of Database Backup Secure 1+1
are changed, they must be changed in the server.xml file.

 In the directory chosen for the installation (by default Ionos-NMS), select the Config folder.
 In this folder, open the file server.xml
 Modify the following line
<var name="RemoteSFTPServerUserName" type="java.lang.String" value="backup" />
<var name="RemoteSFTPServerPwd" type="java.lang.String" value="$agem001" />
<var name="SFTPServerDir" type="java.lang.String" value="/tools/$IONOS-NMS" />
 Save and close the file server.xml
 Restart the IONOS-NMS server
1.2.3.27 - To configure the alarm multi-criteria filtering

This procedure is used to give the capability to apply filter with muti-criteria (several filters in the same colum
or between columns with And/Or condition) on alarm/event in the Fault View, Fault Log, NML View and in the
Event Log and to save these filters. See 5.2.9 - To filter current alarms by multi-criteria
IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05
Page 38/236
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited

SYSTEM INSTALLATION AND MANAGEMENT


 In the directory chosen for the installation (by default Ionos-NMS), select the Config folder.
 In this folder, open the server.xml file
To configure the filter multi-criteria, replace the line:
<!-- multi filters -->
<var name="multiFilters" type="java.lang.Boolean" value="false"/>
by
<!-- multi filters -->
<var name="multiFilters" type="java.lang.Boolean" value="true"/>
 Save and close the server.xml file
 Restart the IONOS-NMS server
1.2.3.28 - To manage the inaccessibility status of the FOT155A by a trap

This procedure is used to manage the inaccessibility status (blue icon) of the FOT155A in relation to the trap
of inaccessibility and not by the polling.
 In the directory chosen for the installation (by default Ionos-NMS), select the Config folder.
 In this folder, open the file server-advanced.xml
To activate the treatment of inaccessibility status by the trap instead of the polling, replace the line
!-- FOT155A polling by trap -->
<var name="FOT155APollingByTrapEnabled" type="java.lang.Boolean" value="false" />
by
!-- FOT155A polling by trap -->
<var name="FOT155APollingByTrapEnabled" type="java.lang.Boolean" value="true" />
 Save and close the file server-advanced.xml
 Restart the IONOS-NMS server
1.2.3.29 - To configure parameters for the ADR10000

This procedure is used to manage the ADR10000 R7.2 and R8.1:


 In the repertory chosen for the installation (by default Ionos-NMS), select the Config folder.
 In this folder, open the file server_advanced.xml
<!-- ADR10000 Parameters -->
<var name="CorbaPort" type="java.lang.String" value="5075" />
<var name="CorbaSession" type="java.lang.String" value="11" />
<var name="CorbaVersion" type="java.lang.String" value="3.5" />
<var name="EMSADRVersion" type="java.lang.String" value="8.1" />
<var name="CorbaUser" type="java.lang.String" value="ems" />
<var name="CorbaPassword" type="java.lang.String" value="SaGeM" />
<var name="HostAdress" type="java.lang.String" value="127.0.0.1" />
<var name="OracleEMSADRHostAdress" type="java.lang.String" value="127.0.0.1" />
<var name="OracleEMSADRUser" type="java.lang.String" value="oracle10" />
<var name="OracleEMSADRPassword" type="java.lang.String" value="oracle10" />
<var name="SchemaNameEMSADR" type="java.lang.String" value="" />
<var name="OracleEMSADRFullBackupDir" type="java.lang.String"
value="/sdh_home/oracle10/backupdir/" />
<!-- End ADR10000 Parameters -->
 Modify the following line :
<var name="EMSADRVersion" type="java.lang.String" value="8.1" />
IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
Page 39/236

SYSTEM INSTALLATION AND MANAGEMENT


Type the EMS-ADR version number:
7.2 for ADR10000 / EMS-ADR R7.2
8.1 for ADR10000 / EMS-ADR R8.1
 Modify the following line :
<var name="HostAdress" type="java.lang.String" value="127.0.0.1" />
Type the IP address of the ADR10000 proxy (EMS-ADR).

The next variables only concern the ADR10000 / EMS-ADR R8.1:


 Modify the following line :
<var name="OracleEMSADRHostAdress" type="java.lang.String" value="127.0.0.1" />
Type the IP address of the.Oracle10 zone of the EMS-ADR 8.1
 Modify if necessary the following line :
<var name="OracleEMSADRUser" type="java.lang.String" value="oracle10" />
<var name="OracleEMSADRPassword" type="java.lang.String" value="oracle10" />
Enter the login / password of the Oracle10 zone of the EMS-ADR 8.1
 Modify the following line :
<var name="SchemaNameEMSADR" type="java.lang.String" value="" />
Enter the schema name (Oracle DB user) of the EMS-ADR 8.1
In order to know the schema name, from the EMS-ADR zone with EMS user, type the SetupEMS command
and choose the option 1: the field Oracle DB user is the schema name.
Ex:
ems(z2-primepower) ~ > SetupEMS.sh
EMS XDM Oracle Setup Menu
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

Show Current Configuration


Check Oracle DB status
Apply Infrastructure Layer to DB
Insert EMS XDM schema to DB
Remove EMS XDM schema from DB
Empty EMS XDM Database data
Reconfigure EMS XDM Database settings

Select an action (q to quit) [1...7,q] --> 1


Database Settings:
Database Server:
10.66.220.52
Oracle DB user:
z2_primepower is the schema name
Oracle service name: z2_primepower
 Modify if necessary the following line :
<var name="OracleEMSADRFullBackupDir" type="java.lang.String"
value="/sdh_home/oracle10/backupdir/" />
Enter the path where the EMS-ADR databases are saved into the Oracle10 zone of the EMS-ADR 8.1
Note: check that the backupdir folder exists or create it if necessary
 Save and close the server-advanced.xml file
 Restart the IONOS-NMS server
1.2.3.30 - To configure ssh protocol with EMS-ADR (ADR10000)
IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05
Page 40/236
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited

SYSTEM INSTALLATION AND MANAGEMENT


This procedure is used to configure SSH protocol to replace FTP for database transfer with Backup 1+1 of
EMS-ADR
Note : Enter the correct values for the SFTP username and SFTP password according to EMSADR SFTP server configuration.

 In the directory chosen for the installation (by default Ionos-NMS), select the Config folder.
 In this folder, open the file server.xml
 If necessary, modify the following line into the section
<!-- Remote EMS ADR Parameters -->

<var name="RemoteSftpEmsLogin" type="java.lang.String" value="root" />


<var name="RemoteSftpEmsPwd" type="java.lang.String" value="SaGeM" />
<!-- End Remote EMS ADR Parameters -->
 Save and close the file server.xml
 Restart the IONOS-NMS server
1.2.3.31 - ADR10000 includes STM or data cards with electrical interfaces

This procedure is used when an ADR10000 includes STM or data cards with electrical interfaces instead of
optical interfaces.
 In the directory chosen for the installation (by default Ionos-NMS), select the Config folder.
 In this folder, open the file server-advanced.xml
Replace the line
<var name="UseETRAllowed" type="java.lang.Boolean" value="false" />
by
<var name="UseETRAllowed" type="java.lang.Boolean" value="true" />
 Save and close the file server-advanced.xml
 Restart the IONOS-NMS server
1.2.3.32 - To configure the number of Client sessions to the server

This procedure is used to configure the number of Client sessions allowed to connect to the IONOS-NMS
Server.
 In the directory chosen for the installation (by default Ionos-NMS), select the Config folder.
 In this folder, open the file server-advanced.xml
To activate the control number of Client sessions, replace the line
<!--active controle of max sessions -->
<var name="maxSessionsEnabled" type="java.lang.Boolean" value="false" />
by
<!--active controle of max sessions -->
<var name="maxSessionsEnabled" type="java.lang.Boolean" value="true" />
To configure the number of Client sessions allowed, modify if necessary the value into the following section
(20 is the value by default).
<!--number of allowed sessions -->
<var name="maxSessions" type="java.lang.Integer" value="20" />
Then, it is possible to connect up to 20 Client sessions using different user profiles (administrator, operator,
observer)
IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
Page 41/236

SYSTEM INSTALLATION AND MANAGEMENT


 Save and close the file server-advanced.xml
 Restart the IONOS-NMS server
Note: (1) When the limitation of maximum Client sessions is reached, a message Maximum
session X exceeded is displayed
(2) It is always possible to open a client session using an administrator profile (whatever the
number of allowed sessions configured in the server-advanced.xml file).
(3) In case of not properly disconnection of Client session, there is a delay allowing a
reconnection after about 5 minutes.
1.2.3.33 - To configure the number of Client sessions per PC Client

This procedure is used to configure the number of Client sessions allowed per PC Client to connect to the
IONOS-NMS Server.
 In the directory chosen for the installation (by default Ionos-NMS), select the Config folder.
 In this folder, open the file server-advanced.xml
To activate the control number of Client sessions per PC Client, replace the line
<!--active controle of one session per PC-->
<var name="maxPCSessionsEnabled" type="java.lang.Boolean" value="false" />
by
<!--active controle of one session per PC-->
<var name="maxPCSessionsEnabled" type="java.lang.Boolean" value="true" />
To configure the number of Client sessions allowed per PC Client, modify if necessary the value into the
following section (1 is the value by default).
<!--max PC sessions -->
<var name="maxPCSessions" type="java.lang.Integer" value="1" />
Then, it is possible to open only one session Client from the PC Client to the IONOS-NMS Server (whatever
the user profile used, administrator, operator or observer)
 Save and close the file server-advanced.xml
 Restart the IONOS-NMS server
Note: (1) When the limitation of maximum PC Client sessions is reached, a message Only X
maxPCSession(s) is allowed on <IP_Address_of_PC_Client> is displayed
(2) In case of not properly disconnection of Client session, there is a delay allowing a
reconnection after about 5 minutes.
1.2.3.34 - To configure the SNMP trap generator

This procedure is used to configure the SNMP trap generator. It generates SNMP traps (alarms and events)
following IONOS-NMS server traps reception sent by the equipments type ADR155C, ADR622 and
ADR2500EXTRA to one or several receivers.
It is possible to apply some filters before the traps sending.
Note : (1) System alarms and NE inaccessibility alarms are not generated.
(2) Clear alarms are generated to the trap receiver.
 In the directory chosen for the installation (by default Ionos-NMS), select the Config/forward
folder.
 In this folder, open the file generation.xml
<netype>
IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05
Page 42/236
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited

SYSTEM INSTALLATION AND MANAGEMENT


<!--Type value="ADR155C"/-->
<!--Type value="ADR622"/-->
<!--Type value="ADR2500Extra"/-->
</netype>
In the netype section, define the NE type criteria.
For example, to activate the traps sending for a ADR155C, replace (uncomment) the line:
<!--Type value="ADR155C"/-->
by
<Type value="ADR155C"/>
In the distant section, define the IP address and port number of the traps receivers.
Uncomment and modify the line:
<distant>
<!--IpAddress value="127.0.0.0/163"/-->
</distant>
by
<IpAddress value="10.0.0.1/163"/>
<IpAddress value="10.0.0.2/164"/>
<IpAddress value="10.0.0.3/165"/>
<IpAddress value="10.0.0.4/166"/>
with
IP address of one trap receiver: 10.0.0.1
Associated port number:
163
Note : The maximun number of traps receivers is 4.

 In the filter-alarm section, it is possible to define some criterias of alarm trap sending.
If necessary, modify and duplicate these lines:
<filter nename=""/>
Enter the NE long name of one equipment, ex: <filter nename="Dijon"/>
Alarm traps of this equipment will be generated
No tag means there is no filtering on this field.
<filter status=""/>
Enter the level of security of alarm (critical, major, minor, warning), ex <filter status="major"/>
Alarm trap with major status will be generated.
<filter eventtype=""/>
Enter the type of alarm, ex <filter eventtype="los"/>
Alarm trap with a type los will be generated.
No tag means there is no filtering on this field.
<filter location="" match="begin"/>
Enter the location of the alarm (board, port ), ex <filter location="PPI" match="begin"/>
All alarm traps with the string beginning by PPI will be generated.
No tag means there is no filtering on this field.
<filter location="" match="exact"/>
Enter the location of the alarm, ex <filter location="PPI-LTU 5:1" match="exact"/>
Note: In this case, the field must be filled with the exactly string of the alarm location
Alarm trap with exactly the "PPI-LTU 5:1" location will be generated.
No tag means there is no filtering on this field.
<filter nedatebegin="2010-03-01 05:00:00" nedateend="2010-03-31 09:00:00"/>
Enter the range of begin/end dates at which alarm was sent by the NE
Alarm traps between the NE begin date nedatebegin and the NE end date nedateend will be generated.
No tag means there is no filtering on this field.
<filter nmsdatebegin="2010-03-01 05:00:00" nmsdateend="2010-03-31 09:00:00"/>
Enter the range of begin/end dates at which alarms were received by manager.
IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
Page 43/236

SYSTEM INSTALLATION AND MANAGEMENT


Alarm traps between the NMS begin date nmsdatebegin and the NMS end date nmsdateend will be
generated
No tag means there is no filtering on this field.

 In the filter-event section, it is possible to define some criterias of event trap sending.
If necessary, modify and duplicate these lines:
<filter nename=""/>
Enter the NE long name of one equipment, ex: <filter nename="Dijon"/>
Event traps of this equipment will be generated
No tag means there is no filtering on this field.
<filter eventtype=""/>
Enter the type of event, ex <filter eventtype="Login"/>
Event trap with a type Login will be generated.
No tag means there is no filtering on this field.
<filter location="" match="begin"/>
Enter the location of the event, ex <filter location="SNC-TRIB" match="begin"/>
All event traps with the string beginning by SNC-TRIB will be generated.
No tag means there is no filtering on this field.
<filter location="" match="exact"/>
Enter the location of the event, ex <filter location="SESSION" match="exact"/>
Note: In this case, the field must be filled with the exactly string of the event location
Event trap with exactly the "SESSION" location will be generated.
No tag means there is no filtering on this field.
<filter nmsdatebegin="2009-12-31 05:00:00" nmsdateend="2010-03-31 09:00:00"/>
Enter the range of begin/end dates at which events were received by manager
Event traps between the NMS begin date nmsdatebegin and the NMS end date nmsdateend will be
generated
No tag means there is no filtering on this field.
 Save and close the file generation.xml
 Restart the IONOS-NMS server

Note (1): Absence of tag in nename, status, eventtype, location, nedate, nmsdate means
there is no filtering on these fields.
Note (2): If more tags have been defined, they will be interpreted by a condition of type OR.
Note (3): If more different filtering have been defined in the generation.xml file, they will be interpreted
by a condition of type AND.

An usage example of generation.xml file is available in Appendix Example of SNMP trap generator
configuration
1.2.3.35 - Configuration file to display the long name of the trail(s) in relation to its alarm
pk

This procedure is used to set the parameters used by a java program to be able to obtain the long name of the
trail(s) in relation to its alarm pk.
 In the directory chosen for the installation (by default Ionos-NMS), select the Config folder.
 In this folder, open the file traplongname.xml

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


Page 44/236
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited

SYSTEM INSTALLATION AND MANAGEMENT


<!-- TrapLongName -->
<var name="TrapLongNameServer" type="java.lang.String" value="127.0.0.1" />
Enter the IP address of the Ionos-NMS server
<var name="TrapLongNameUser" type="java.lang.String" value="observer" />
<var name="TrapLongNamePassword" type="java.lang.String" value="public" />
Enter the login and password of a Ionos-NMS user
 Save and close the file traplongname.xml
1.2.3.36 - To run the getTrailLongNames script

This script is used to display the long name of the trail(s) in relation to its alarm pk.
It can be run from the IONOS-NMS server or in a DOS commands window from any PC client (in this case fill
the TrapLongNameServer variable with the correct IP address of the Ionos-NMS server in the
traplongname.xml file) (see 1.2.3.35 - Configuration file to display the long name of the trail(s) in relation to
its alarm pk)
 In the directory chosen for installation (Ionos-NMS or /tools/IONOS-NMS by default), select the
bin folder.
 Run the command : getTrailLongNames.bat <alarm pk>

(with Windows)

Or
 Run the command : ./getTrailLongNames.sh <alarm pk>

(with Solaris)

With <alarm pk> as input parameter


An usage example of this script is available in Appendix Example of getTrailLongNames script usage
1.2.3.37 - To configure the FMX backup configuration file

This procedure is used to configure the FMX backup configuration file. This is available only for a FMX-GIES
type and on a Windows Ionos-NMS server.
 In the directory chosen for the installation (by default Ionos-NMS), select the Config folder.
 In this folder, open the file server-advanced.xml
To configure the time lapse to read the file backup size and its conversion after the execution of the tpimms
and tpimmsconverter processes during the FMX backup configuration files, modify if necessary the value (5
seconds by default):
<!-- FMX Backup -->
<var name="FMXBackupTimeout" type="java.lang.Integer" value="5" /> (in seconds)
To activate the periodic backup for all FMX-GIES, replace the line:
<!-- FMX Backup -->
<var name="FMXDailyBackupEnabled" type="java.lang.Boolean" value="false" />
by
<var name="FMXDailyBackupEnabled" type="java.lang.Boolean" value="true" />
To configure the delay between two FMX database backup, modify if necessary the value (1440 minutes, by
default):
<!-- FMX Backup -->
<var name="DelayBetweenTwoFmxBackupInventory" type="java.lang.Integer" value="1440" /> (in
minutes)
No automatic backup (ex: in case of NE audit) is done if this delay is not exceeded.
To activate or not the auto-discovery of the FMX-GIES inventory, modif if necessary the line:
<!-- FMX Backup -->
<var name="isFmxInventoryLikeVne" type="java.lang.Boolean" value="false" />
Auto-discovery of the FMXGIES inventory is available.
by
IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
Page 45/236

SYSTEM INSTALLATION AND MANAGEMENT


<var name="isFmxInventoryLikeVne" type="java.lang.Boolean" value="true" />
The behaviour of the FMX-GIES is like a VNE: no auto-discovery of the inventory is done, need to add
manually container(s) and interface(s) from the NE properties.
 Save and close the file server-advanced.xml
 Restart the IONOS-NMS server
Caution: After the restart of the Ionos-NMS server, if no FMX database backup has been already done, it is
necessary to wait the end of the sequentialy task of backups (before to run a FMX audit for example).
1.2.3.38 - To configure the user rights to perform actions from the Federator application

This procedure is used to configure the user rights to perform actions from the Federator application.
Actions are: Backup server, Change server, Restore from last backup, Start server and Stop server.
 In the directory chosen for
Config/EasyLauncher folder.

the

installation

(by

default

Ionos-NMS),

select

the

 In this folder, open the file Federator_users.xml


 To add new user(s) and allocate rights to perform action(s), duplicate and/or modify the following
section:
<user name="admin" password="secret">
<action name="backupServer"
value="true"/>
<action name="changeServer"
value="true"/>
<action name="lastRestoreServer"
value="true"/>
<action name="startServer"
value="true"/>
<action name="stopServer"
value="true"/>
</user>
Enter the user name and its associated password.
For each action name, enter the true value to allow the user to perform the action or false to not allow the
action.
Note : These users must also exist in the Admin View of Ionos-NMS server (8- USERS
MANAGEMENT)

 Save and close the file Federator_users.xml


 Stop and restart the EasyLauncher application
On Solaris, from the Ionos-NMS folder/bin folder, run the following scripts:
- stopEasyLaunch.sh (to stop the easylauncher process)
- startEasyLaunchmanual.sh in ksh mode (to start the easylauncher process)

On Windows, right-click on the Easy Launcher icon in the task bar and select Exit menu: The
Ionos-NMS server and any process launched by Easy Launcher will be stopped.
Then, restart the Ionos-NMS server using the menu Start/All Programs/IONOS-NMS/Ionos-NMS
(easy launcher) shortcut.
Note : (1) When a user is not allowed to perform an action a message You dont have privileges to
perform this action is displayed
(2) If the password of the user is not correct, a message <action> failed of
<IP_Address_Ionos-NMS> :wrong password is displayed.

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


Page 46/236
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited

SYSTEM INSTALLATION AND MANAGEMENT


1.2.4 - Available configurations on Client IONOS-NMS
1.2.4.1 - To configure the help on line

 In the directory chosen for installation (Ionos-NMS by default), select the Config folder.
 In the folder, open the file Profiler.xml.
Replace the line :

by

<HELP html="${BROWSER} ${ROOTDIR}/help/fr/hh_start1.htm"/>


<HELP html="${BROWSER} C:/Program Files/Ionos-NMS/help/en/hh_start.htm">

When the Client application is started, check the help on line works correctly (menu Help>Help on line).
1.2.4.2 - To configure Internet Explorer to use HTTP Browser on the equipment of type
ADR

 Open Internet Explorer/ menu Tools / sub-menu Internet Options.


 In the General tab, click on [Delete cookies] and validate the removal
 In the General tab, click on [ Parameters ].

 Tick the button [On each page visit ]


 Define the disk space to be used to 30 Mo (if Internet Explorer version < 5.5 put 1 Mo)
 Click on [OK]
 In the zone "Temporary Internet Files", click on [Delete files ]

 Tick [Delete all content outside connection], then click on [OK].


 click on [OK] in the [Internet Options] dialog box
 Close Internet Explorer.
IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
Page 47/236

SYSTEM INSTALLATION AND MANAGEMENT


1.2.4.3 - To configure Internet Explorer to use HTTP Proxy

 Open Internet Explore menu Tools / sub-menu Internet Options.


 In the tab Advanced, for Parameters HTTP 3.2
- Tick Use HTTP 3.2
- Tick Use HTTP 3.2 with a connection by proxy
 In the tab Connections, click on [ LAN Parameters ]
 Tick [ Use a proxy server ]
 Click on [ Advanced ]
 Tick [ Use the same proxy server for all the protocols ]
-

On the level of type "HTTP", to fill address IP of the proxy server (x.x.x.x) as well as the
number of the port of the proxy (4002)

Note : if FTP must be launched on the client PC, tick off the case Use the same proxy server
the protocols.

for all

In Exceptions, list all the primary and secondary addresses of ADRs not supporting the
proxy (case of the ADR155C P2.6, EXT155HA, ADR155E, ADR10000 or ADR10000HN ),
separated by ";".

 Apply these modifications then to close Internet Explorer.


1.2.4.4 - To inhibit the data entry of spaces in the M1400 name of the equipment

 In the repertory chosen for the installation (by default Ionos-NMS), select the Config folder.
 In this folder, open the file lfclient_ext_parameters.xml
 Replace the line:
< property name="allowM1400Blank" type="Boolean" value = "true"
by
< property name="allowM1400Blank" type="Boolean" value = "false"
Caution: The taking into account of the file modification will be effective only after launching of Client
IONOS-NMS.
Note: By default, the data entry of spaces in the M1400 name of the equipment is authorized.
1.2.4.5 - To activate the data entry of upercase in the M1400 name and longname
IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05
Page 48/236
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited

SYSTEM INSTALLATION AND MANAGEMENT


 In the repertory chosen for the installation (by default Ionos-NMS), select the Config folder.
 In this folder, open the file client-advanced.xml
 Replace the lines:
<var name="SubnetworkNameUpperCaseMask" type="java.lang.Boolean" value="false"/>
<var name="NEM1400NameUpperCaseMask" type="java.lang.Boolean" value="false"/>
<var name="NELongNameUpperCaseMask" type="java.lang.Boolean" value="false"/>
<var name="TrafficCarrierLongNameUpperCaseMask" type="java.lang.Boolean" value="false"/>
<var name="ETHNormalizedNameUpperCaseMask" type="java.lang.Boolean" value="false"/>
by :
<var name="SubnetworkNameUpperCaseMask" type="java.lang.Boolean" value="true"/>
<var name="NEM1400NameUpperCaseMask" type="java.lang.Boolean" value="true"/>
<var name="NELongNameUpperCaseMask" type="java.lang.Boolean" value="true"/>
<var name="TrafficCarrierLongNameUpperCaseMask" type="java.lang.Boolean" value="true"/>
<var name="ETHNormalizedNameUpperCaseMask" type="java.lang.Boolean" value="true"/>
Caution: The taking into account of the file modification will be effective only after launching of Client
IONOS-NMS.
Note: By default, the data entry using lowercase and upercase is authorized.
These parameters are concerning respectively sub-networks, name M1400 and longname of network
elements, longname of trail and bearer SDH.
1.2.4.6 - To configure the automatic deconnection of client after inactivity period

 In the repertory chosen for the installation (by default Ionos-NMS), select the Config folder.
 In this folder, open the file client_advanced.xml
 Modify the line (time in minutes)
<var name="MaxInactivityDuration" type="java.lang.Integer" value="0"/>
Caution: The taking into account of the file modification will be effective only after launching of Client
IONOS-NMS.
Note: By default, the automatic deconnection is not configured.
1.2.4.7 - To configure the number of NEs for which a warning message is displayed in NML
View

 In the repertory chosen for the installation (by default Ionos-NMS), select the Config folder.
 In this folder, open the file client_advanced.xml
 Modify the line (by default, number of NEs = 50)
<var name="NesNumberTreshold" type="java.lang.Integer" value="50"/>
Caution: The taking into account of the file modification will be effective only after launching of Client
IONOS-NMS.
1.2.4.8 - To deactivate the automatic routing of trails/bearer SDH

 In the repertory chosen for the installation (by default Ionos-NMS), select the Config folder.
 In this folder, open the file client_advanced.xml
 Replace the lines:
<var name="SDHAutoRoutingActivated" type="java.lang.Boolean" value="true"/>
by
<var name="SDHAutoRoutingActivated" type="java.lang.Boolean" value="false"/>

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
Page 49/236

SYSTEM INSTALLATION AND MANAGEMENT


Caution: The taking into account of the file modification will be effective only after launching of Client
IONOS-NMS.
Note: By default, the automatic routing is not activated.
1.2.4.9 - To configure the use of Proxy for SLF-v1 and SLF-N

 In the directory chosen for installation (Ionos-NMS by default), select the Config folder.
 In the folder, open the file Profiler.xml.
 Uncomment and modify the line :
<FHPROXY value="-ipproxy ${IP_SRV} portproxy 5588 SUPERVISOR"/>
 Comment the line :
<!--FHPROXY value=""/-->
Caution: The taking into account of the file modification will be effective only after launching of Client
IONOS-NMS.
1.2.4.10 - To configure the use of Proxy for SLF-H

 In the directory chosen for installation (Ionos-NMS by default), select the Config folder.
 In the folder, open the file Profiler.xml.
 Uncomment and modify the line :
<FHPROXY_SNMP value="-ipproxy ${IP_SRV}:5590"/>
 Comment the line :
<!FHPROXY_SNMP value=""/-->
Caution: The taking into account of the file modification will be effective only after launching of Client
IONOS-NMS.
1.2.4.11 - To configure the use of client without an alarm window

 In the directory chosen for installation (Ionos-NMS by default), select the Config folder.
 In the folder, open the file client-advanced.xml.
 Add the line :
<<var name="FaultViewEnabled" type="java.lang.Boolean" value="false"/>
Caution: The taking into account of the file modification will be effective only after launching of Client
IONOS-NMS.
1.2.4.12 - To display the ADR10000 Proxy menu

 In the repertory chosen for the installation (by default Ionos-NMS), select the Config folder.
 In this folder, open the file client-advanced.xml
 Replace the line:
<var name="ProxyADR10000Enabled" type="java.lang.Boolean" value="false"/>
by
<var name="ProxyADR10000Enabled" type="java.lang.Boolean" value="true"/>
Caution: The taking into account of the file modification will be effective only after launching of Client
IONOS-NMS.
1.2.4.13 - To configure the launching of the Equipment View (ADR10000)

This procedure is used to configure how to launch the ADR10000 Equipment View.
To open the EMS-ADR application instead of to open the shelf view of the selected NE,
 In the repertory chosen for the installation (by default Ionos-NMS), select the Config folder.
 In this folder, open the file client-advanced.xml
IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05
Page 50/236
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited

SYSTEM INSTALLATION AND MANAGEMENT


 Replace the line:
<var name="adr10kview" type="java.lang.Boolean" value="false"/>
by
<var name="adr10kview" type="java.lang.Boolean" value="true"/>
In this case, you have to type the User Name and Password of EMS-ADR application.

Caution: The taking into account of the file modification will be effective only after launching of
Client IONOS-NMS.
Note: By default, the double-click to display the Equipment View opens the shelf view of the
selected NE.

1.2.5 - The Application Easy Launcher under Windows


Easy Launcher is a utility which allows:


to start the server and the client of IonosNMS,

to permanently know the state of the server according to the icon displayed,

to be able to visualize the log of the server and the log of errors,

to start backups and restores

Easy Launcher Menus

Figure 1.6 : easy launcher (1)


 Start client

to start the client

 Start server

to start the server (grayed when the server is started)

 Stop server

to stop the server (grayed when the server is stopped)

 Exit

to quit Easy Launcher

 About :

to display client and server version

 Other

to launch the following pop up menu :

Figure 1.7 : easy launcher (2)


IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
Page 51/236

SYSTEM INSTALLATION AND MANAGEMENT


 Backup oracle database

to perform a backup of oracle database

 Restore oracle database


the server is started

to perform a restore of oracle database (grayed when

 Backup equipement database :

to perform a backup of equipment configuration

 Display log files

to display logs of servers and the logs errors

 Configuration

to configure easy launcher

 Tools

to launch the following pop up menu :

Figure 1.8 : easy launcher (3)


 Start TFTP server

to start TFTP server

 Start SFTP server

to start SFTP server

 Start FTP server

to start FTP server

 HTTP Proxy
installed)

to perform a Proxy configuration (grayed if the software is not

 Generate Pack trace

to generate a zipped file of several files used for debug

1.2.6 - To start the Server Application with Windows


1.2.6.1 - To start the Server with Easy Launcher

The license server has been run beforehand.


In Windows, double-click the IONOS-NMS Easy Launcher icon : according to the configuration, the server is
launched automatically or click on menu Start Server of Easy Launcher. The following screen is displayed.

Figure 1.9 : Window - Start Ionos-NMS server


Click on [Terminate] when "IonosNMS server is started" is ticked.
Launch also the server TFTP by clicking on the menu Start TFTP Server.
1.2.6.2 - To start the server without Easy Launcher
Caution: The launching of server without Easy Launcher in not recommended.

The license server has been run beforehand.


Under Windows, double-click on the Ionos-NMS Server icon (or use the menu To start/Programs) : The DOS
commands window opens.
IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05
Page 52/236
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited

SYSTEM INSTALLATION AND MANAGEMENT


Caution: Always keep this window open or reduce it.

Figure 1.10 : DOS commands window


The server is ready when the following line appears "TMS up in secure mode".
Launch also the server TFTP by double-clicking on the TFTP icon.

1.2.7 - To start the Client Application with Windows


 The Server Application has been started beforehand (see 1.2.5 -).
 In Windows, double-click the IONOS-NMS Client icon (or use the menu Start/Programs).
 The window Connect to which Name Server ? is displayed

Figure 1.11 : Window - Connect to which Name Server


 enter the server name (Localhost for local server) and its port number (always 1099).
 Click [OK] : The Login window is displayed (if an error is detected, a message is displayed).

Figure 1.12 : Login Window


 In this window, enter the user name (User name field) and password (Password field) : by default,
the passwords corresponding to the default users admin, operator and observer are respectively
secret, private and public.
Caution:To connect a Ldap user to the Ionos-NMS server, type for the user, the name in the same
form that it has been created in the Ionos database and its associated password.(ie: olivier.dupont)
(see :Figure 8.20)
IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
Page 53/236

SYSTEM INSTALLATION AND MANAGEMENT


 Click [OK] to validate the window: the main view is displayed (see 2.2 -).
Remarks :The user profile defines the user rights on the Application:
. the administrator has all rights.
. the operator has all rights except the rights on the Admin view.
. the observer can only consult the application.
Refer to the table in Appendix : Rights linked to each profile created by default.
1.2.7.1 - To configure the time difference between client and server

This procedure is used to give the capability to start the client application using a time zone different from
Ionos-NMS server.
In this case, the begin date and NE date of the alarms displayed in the PC client are adjusted on the IonosNMS server (and not on the Client).
Create a new shortcut or modify the command line in the properties of the shortcut for Ionos-NMS client.
Open the properties of the Start/All Programs/Ionos-NMS 5.4 (client) shortcut, and add at the end of the line
tdiff H- or tdiff H option.
With H- in hour(s) if Time Zone of the Ionos-NMS Server is GMT HH:00
or
With H in hour(s) if Time Zone of the Ionos-NMS Server is GMT +HH:00
Example:
Time Zone of the Ionos-NMS Server is GMT 06:00
Time Zone of the Ionos-NMS Client is GMT + 01:00
The line command to start the Client must be:
"C:\Program Files\Ionos-NMS-54rev7\bin\client.exe" -f --begin -client -Xms15m -Xmx512m --end -tdiff 7Note: Only the Time zone in hour(s) is managed (ex: GMT +05:30 is not managed).

1.2.8 - To close the Server Application with Windows


1.2.8.1 - To close the Server with Easy Launcher

 Click on the Easy Launcher icon in the tools bar.


 Click on the menu Stop Server.
1.2.8.2 - To close the Server without Easy Launcher.

In the DOS commands window (see Figure 1.10 above) click [Ctrl] [C] on the [X] button at the top right.

1.2.9 - To close the Client Application


In the menus bar, select File > Exit.

1.2.10 - To start the HTTP Proxy Application with Windows


Under Windows, double-to click on the Ionos Proxy 3.2 (HTTP) icon (or to use the menu To start Programs):
the following window is displayed.

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


Page 54/236
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited

SYSTEM INSTALLATION AND MANAGEMENT

Figure 1.13 : Window HTTP Proxy Application


The proxy is operational if the IP address of server IONOS-NMS is present in "List of NMS Servers" (see
1.2.3.4 - ).
Caution: Always keep this window open or reduce it.

1.2.11 - To close the HTTP Proxy Application with Windows


In the menus bar, select File > Exit.
Confirm the closing.

1.2.12 - To start the Proxy Application for SLF-v1 and SLF-N


Under Windows, double-to click on the Start Ionos-Proxy 3.2 (SLF-v1 F-N) icon (or to use the menu To start
Programs) : a DOS command window is displayed.

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
Page 55/236

SYSTEM INSTALLATION AND MANAGEMENT

Figure 1.14 : Window SLF-v1 SLF-N Proxy Application


Caution: Always keep this window open or reduce it.

1.2.13 - To close the Proxy Application for SLF-v1 and SLF-N


Under Windows, double-to click on the Stop Ionos-Proxy 3.2 (SLF-v1 and SLF-N) icon (or to use the menu
To start Programs) : the DOS command window is closed.

1.2.14 - To start the Proxy Application for SLF-H under Windows


Under Windows, double-to click on the Start Ionos-Proxy 3.2 (SLF-H) icon (or to use the menu To start
Programs) : the DOS command window is displayed.

Figure 1.15 : Window SLF-H Proxy Application

Caution: Always keep this window open or reduce it.

1.2.15 - To close the Proxy Application for SLF-H


Under Windows, close the DOS command window to stop Ionos-Proxy 3.2 (SLF-H)

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


Page 56/236
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited

SYSTEM INSTALLATION AND MANAGEMENT

1.3 - TO INSTALL THE CD FOR SOLARIS


The IONOS-NMS software is supplied on a CD with an user guide.
The CD contains in the directory Install :


nmsserver_setup.sh (for the installation of Server Application with Solaris).

proxy_setup.sh (for the installation of Proxy Applications with Solaris).

The license server is installed automatically, when the server is installed.

1.3.1 - To install the Server and Client Applications


The operating system and the database Oracle have been installed beforehand on the workstation where the
server application is installed.
1.3.1.1 - To install the Server Application with Solaris
Caution: The installation of the Server Application must be carried out by a personnal qualified
Sagemcom.

 Run the server_setup.sh executable (Server Applications) which is in the directory /install.
 Follow the installation instructions : choose a directory (the server is installed by default in
/tools/IONOS-NMS/).
a/ All the scrtipts are installed in the scripts folder of the directory chosen for the installation
(by default, /tools/IONOS-NMS/scripts).
b/ The backup files will be saved in the db-backup folder of the selected directory (by default,
/data/IONOS-NMS/db-backup/server and /data/IONOS-NMS/db-backup/eqpt).
Copy of license file
 In the directory chosen for installation (IONOS-NMS by default), select the Config. folder.
 In the Config. folder, copy the LICENSE.DAT file.
 Edit this file and add the path of directory in which it has been copied.
1.3.1.2 - To install the Client Application with Windows

 Follow the installation instructions: see 1.2.1.2 1.3.1.3 - To install the HTTP Proxy Application with Solaris

 Run on the executable proxy_setup.sh (Proxy Application) which is in the directory /install.
 Follow the installations instructions : choose a directory (the proxy is installed by default in
/tools/IONOS-PROXY).
 Close the window "run" at the end of the installation.
Caution: In the case of the use of HTTP Proxy, to guarantee the access security to the equipment, it is
possible to add IP address of the server with a habilitation "Supervisor" in each NE of type ADR155C
P3, ADR2500C, ADR2500 EXTRA or ADR63E1 which will be managed by IONOS-NMS. For that use
HTTP browser: menu "Equipment/Management to add IP address of the server in the table "List
Managers" while clicking on "Supervisor". validate the modification with "Apply".
The HTTP Proxy is available with :
- ADR155C P3.5 and > P3.5
- ADR2500C P2.4 and > P2.4
- ADR63E1 P2.0 and > P2.0
- ADR2500 EXTRA
IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
Page 57/236

SYSTEM INSTALLATION AND MANAGEMENT


-

ADR155CPE
ADR 622

1.3.2 - To install LCT application for equipment (FMX, Sagem-Link, FSP2000,


FSP3000, ADR155E)
See 1.2.2 -

1.3.3 - Available configurations on Server IONOS-NMS


See 1.2.3 -

1.3.4 - Available configurations on Client IONOS-NMS


See 1.2.3.28 -

1.3.5 - To start the Server Application with Solaris


At the boot of the workstation, the database server (ORACLE), the license server and the server IONOS-NMS
automatically start : if the server stopped, to restart it:
 Log on as root.
 Enter the command ksh [].
 Enter the command /tools/IONOS-NMS/scripts/startnmsserver []
 Check with the command ps ef | grep bootstrap the java process is activated.
 Do a logout.

1.3.6 - To start the Client Application with Windows


See 1.2.7 -

1.3.7 - To close the Server Application with Solaris


 Log on as root.
 Enter the command ksh [].
 Enter the command /tools/IONOS-NMS/scripts/stopnmsserver []
 Do a logout.

1.3.8 - To close the Client Application with Windows


See 1.2.9 -

1.3.9 - To start the Proxy Applications with Solaris


At the boot of the workstation, the database server (ORACLE), the license server, the server IONOS-NMS and
the HTTP Proxy, the SLF-v1, the SLF-N and the SLF-H automatically start : if one Proxy is stopped, to restart
it:
 Log on as root.
 Enter the command ksh [].
 Enter the command /tools/IONOS-NMS/scripts/startproxy []
 Check with the command ps ef | grep proxy if the process is activated.
IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05
Page 58/236
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited

SYSTEM INSTALLATION AND MANAGEMENT


 Logout.

1.3.10 - To stop the Proxy Application with Solaris


 Log on as root.
 Enter the command ksh [].
 Enter the command /tools/IONOS-NMS/scripts/stopproxy []
 Logout.

1.3.11 - To restart a SUN station with Solaris


 Log on as root.
 Enter the command ksh [].
 Enter the command /tools/IONOS-NMS/scripts/globalrestart []
 Do a logout.

1.3.12 - To restart the Oracle database and the IONOS-NMS server with Solaris
 Log on as root.
 Enter the command ksh [].
 Enter the command /tools/IONOS-NMS/scripts/oracle-and-nmsserver-restart []
 Do a logout.
This script stops the server IONOS-NMS and the database Oracle, then restarts the database oracle and
restarts the server IONOS-NMS.

1.4 - TO INSTALL THE IONOS FEDERATOR


A Ionos Federator is supplied with the Client Application of IONOS-NMS. It is used to supervise the alarm
state of several Ionos-NMS servers.

1.4.1 - To install the Client Application of IONOS-NMS


The Client Apllication of IONOS-NMS have been installed beforehand on the PC where the alarms Federator
is launched.
See 1.1.3 -Workstations
After the installation of Client application, a new icon is created on the desk :
- Ionos-NMS 5.3 (Federator)

1.4.2 - To modify the configuration file


Before launching the Ionos Federator, the configuration file must be updated.
 In the directory chosen for installation (Ionos-NMS by default), select the Config folder.
 In the folder, open the Federator.xml file.
 Modify, if necessary, the background image updating the path of "Background File"
 Modify, if necesary, the time intervall between two refreshes in second (30 seconds by default)
 Modify, if necessary, the time intervall between two attempts of connection with each server in
second (120 seconds by default)
IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
Page 59/236

SYSTEM INSTALLATION AND MANAGEMENT



 Define the list of servers IONOS-NMS controlled by the federator. For each server, give :
- The name of server which will displayed on the map
- The IP address of server
- The type ("none", and if function Backup 1+1 of IONOS-NMS Servers is used "principal" or
"backup")
- The port (always 1099)
- The position XY of the icon on the map in pixels
<federator>
<background file="../resources/background.jpg" />
<refresh pool_refresh_value="30" />
<reconnect pool_reconnect_value="120" />
<client open_mcp_client="../bin/client.exe --begin -client -Xms15m -Xmx256m --end" />
<servers>
<server name="10.142.63.173" ip_adress="10.142.63.173" type="backup" port="1099" location_x="400"
location_y="150"/>
<server name="10.142.33.119" ip_adress="10.142.33.119" type="principal" port="1099" location_x="500"
location_y="300"/>
<server name="10.142.33.115" ip_adress="10.142.33.115" type="none" port="1099" location_x="300"
location_y="300"/>
</servers>
</federator>
Note :This configuration will be effective only after launching of Federator Apllication.

1.4.3 - To start the Ionos Federator


 Double-click on the icon of federator .
 The window federator Login is displayed :

 In this window, enter the user name (User name field) and password (Password field) : by default,
the passwords corresponding to the default users admin, operator and observer are respectively
secret, private and public. The same passwors is used for the connection of Federator with all the
servers IONOS-NMS defined in the configuration file.
 Click [OK] to validate the window : the main view of Federator is displayed.
Notes : The user name and the password entered in the window "Login" of Federator will be used to
Open a Client.
The user profile defines the user rights on the Application:
. the administrator has all rights.
. the operator has all rights except the rights on the Admin view.
. the observer can only consult the application.
Refer to the table in Appendix : Rights linked to each profile created by default.
Notes : It is possible to start Ionos Federator with a fixed Login/Password. For this, you have to modify
the command line in the properties of the shorcut for Ionos Federator.
IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05
Page 60/236
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited

SYSTEM INSTALLATION AND MANAGEMENT


Open the properties Start/All Programms/IONOS-NMS/IONOS-NMS(federator) and add at the end
of the line : -username Your-login-name -password Your-password
For example with user admin:
"C:\Program Files\Ionos-NMS\jre\bin\javaw.exe" -jar ..\lib\beans\sfederatorapp.jar cfg
..\config\Federator.xml username admin -password secret

The user name and the password entered in the window "Login" of Federator will be used to Open a
Client.
The user profile defines the user rights on the Application:
. the administrator has all rights.
. the operator has all rights except the rights on the Admin view.
. the observer can only consult the application.
Refer to the table in Appendix : Rights linked to each profile created by default.

1.4.4 - To close the Ionos Federator


In the menus bar of Federator application, select File > Exit.

1.5 - DATABASE MANAGEMENT


The used database is ORACLE version 10.2 or 11.2 with Windows 7 (x64 bits)/ Windows 200SRV R2 (x64
bits)
It must be installed before the server application, on the same workstation.

1.5.1 - To backup the database


Two types of backup on line are provided:


a menu provided in the IONOS-NMS application.


a command script.
These two commands backup the data used by IONOS-NMS application.
1.5.1.1 - Backup on line from the client application

 In the menus bar, select File > Forced backup : the Force Backup window is displayed.

Figure 1.16 : Force Backup Window


 In this window, enter eventually a comment.
 Click [Launch backup] to launch the backup.
IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
Page 61/236

SYSTEM INSTALLATION AND MANAGEMENT

Figure 1.17 : Backup /database Window


 Click [Close] when export terminated is displayed.
Notes :

The backup is copied in the directory given in the File.xml file, which is in the
Config folder in the directory chosen for installation (backup directory by default :
c:\temp\oracle.backup with Windows and /data/IONOS-NMS/db-backup/server
with Solaris).
Le filename with Windows has the following format:
IONOS-NMS-Database-yyyy-mm-dd.dat
IONOS-NMS-Database-yyyy-mm-dd--nn.dat if several backups are launched the
same day.
The comment is written in the file.txt (same name).
Le file with Solaris is copied in:
/yyyy/yyyy-mm/yyyy-mm-ddnn.dat.gz
Yyyy-mm-dd is the date of backup launching and nn is the number of backup in the
day.

1.5.1.2 - Backup on line from a script with Solaris

 Log on as root.
 Enter the command ksh [].
 Run the /tools/IONOS-NMS/scripts/db-backup[parameters] script.


Indicate the following parameter values between parentheses:


a/ blank (backup with automatic filename in rule)
b/ -f filename (backup with file filename).
c/ -c comment (backup by inserting commentary file).
1.5.1.3 - To configure a Periodic backup off line with Solaris

 Log on as root.
 Enter the command ksh [].
 Enter the command /tools/IONOS-NMS/scripts/configure-periodic-backup with the hour of periodic
backup.
For example : configure-periodic-backup 03 15 (for a backup at 3h15 every days).
Accept the warning if a periodic backup is already defined.
The periodic backup will be launched once by day.
1.5.1.4 - Copy of backup directories on magnetic tape with Solaris

 Log on as root.
 Enter the command ksh [].
 Put a tape not write protected in the tape drive
IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05
Page 62/236
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited

SYSTEM INSTALLATION AND MANAGEMENT


 Run the /tools/IONOS-NMS/scripts/backup-on-tape script.

1.5.2 - To restore the database


The restoration on line allows to restore one of the backup of IONOS-NMS, by using a script. In this case, the
server IONOS-NMS is stopped, but the database ORACLE is always operational. This command restores the
data used by IONOS-NMS application (backed-up data with Force Backup or with the backup script) .
1.5.2.1 - To restore of a backup with Windows

 Stop the IONOS-NMS server.


 Run the import.cmd in the bin folder of the directory selected for installation (by default Ionos-NMS) .
 Enter the filename (with path).
Note : The ORACLE database must be in operation.
The path should not contain of space.
1.5.2.2 - List of available backup with Solaris

 Log on as root.
 Enter the command ksh [].
 Run the /tools/IONOS-NMS/scripts/backup-list script
This script is used to recover the list of all the backups in the server.
1.5.2.3 - Restore of a backup with Solaris

 Log on as root.
 Enter the command ksh [].
 If necessary, run the /tools/IONOS-NMS/scripts/backup-list script
Notes : The filenames are displayed in the following form: yyyy-mm-dd-nn.dat.gz

 Run the /tools/IONOS-NMS/scripts/db-restore[parameters] script to restore the database from a


backup file.
Indicate the following parameter values between parentheses:
yyyy mm dd nn (recovers the file yyyy-mm-dd---nn.dat.gz)
This script displays the data entered for the forced backup (user, data and comment if available) and the user
must confirm its choice. The server IONOS-NMS is stopped and the restoration is launched. Then the server
IONOS-NMS is restarted automatically.
1.5.2.4 - Restore of backup directories copied on magnetic tape with Solaris

 Log on as root.
 Enter the command ksh [].
 Put the tape in the tape drive
 Run the script: /tools/IONOS-NMS/scripts/restore-from-tape.
 Then, restore one of the backups using the restore procedure.
This script copies the backup directories of the tape on the disk.

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
Page 63/236

SYSTEM INSTALLATION AND MANAGEMENT

1.5.3 - To migrate a database


This procedure makes it possible to migrate a database version P3 (P3.4) or P4 (P4.1, P4.2, P4.3, P4.4, P5.1,
P5.2, P5;3, P5.4) towards a database version P5.5, starting from a script of command, the server of
application being stopped but not the data base.
Note: For migrations starting from previous version refer to the technical support
Caution: The used database since the version P5.1 change. (see 1.5 - Database management)
1.5.3.1 - Migration of a database with Windows.

 Launch a Forced Backup on IONOS-NMS P3 (P3.4) or P4 or P5 (menu Forced Backup).


 Export the logs (Fault Log and Event Log).
 Stop the server IONOS-NMS P3 or P4. or P5
 Rename the directory of installation of IONOS-NMS P3 or P4 or P5.
 Install, if necessary, the database used with the current IONOS-NMS version (see 1.5 -Database
Management).
 Install the new IONOS-NMS Server P5.5 (see 1.2 -)
 Run the script dbmig in the folder bin of directory chosen for the installation of IONOS-NMS P5.5 (by
default Ionos-NMS ) with the following parameters:
dbmig sys dbnms [username old database ] [passwd] [username new database] [passwd]
Note : It is not necessary to give the usernames and passwords if the database is the migration is
done in the same user.
If the "user" of new database is different, it will be created automatically by IONOS-NMS during the
migration. If the user was created before, the migration doesn't work.

The migration starts. The results are displayed during the processing.
The indication of end of processing is displayed.
Note :The database ORACLE must be in operation.

 Start the server IONOS-NMS P5.5


 Install a new IONOS-NMS Client P5.5 and run the client.
 Check the database has been migrated correctly.
 Purge the logs (Fault Log and Event Log).
Note: An executable file is supplied to re-align the general parameters and the capability parameters
of Network Element (see section To audit a network element (NE)) after a migration.
- Launch the IONOS-NMS server
- Modify the value of SNMP time-out in the Preferences of NE ("SNMP
requests configuration for all NEs " in menu Tools/Preferences/NE). Put 2s
instead of 30s.
- In the directory chosen for installation (Ionos-NMS or /tools/IONOS-NMS by
default), select the bin folder.
- Run the command: run ./bsh/align-NEs.bsh (PC), then give the login ad
password of the user IONOS-NMS and the IP address of the server.
- Relaunch the server and set back the initial value of the SNMP time-out

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


Page 64/236
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited

SYSTEM INSTALLATION AND MANAGEMENT


1.5.3.2 - Migration of a database with Solaris.

 Launch a Forced Backup on IONOS-NMS P3 (P3.4), P4 or P5 (menu Forced Backup).


 Export the logs (Fault Log and Event Log).
 Stop the server IONOS-NMS P3, P4 or P5
 Move the directory of installation of IONOS-NMS P3, P4 or P5(for example in IONOS-NMS.old).
 Install, if necessary, the database used with the current IONOS-NMS version (see 1.5 - Database
Management).
 Install the new IONOS-NMS Server P5.5 (see 1.2 -)
 Log on as root
 To position on the directory /tools/IONOS-NMS/bin
 Run :
/dbmig sys dbnms [username old database ] [passwd] [username new database] [passwd]
Note : It is not necessary to give the usernames and passwords if the database is the migration is
done in the same user.
If the "user" of new database is different, it will be created automatically by IONOS-NMS during the
migration. If the user was created before, the migration doesn't work.

The migration starts. The results are displayed during the processing.
The indication of end of processing is displayed.
Note : The database ORACLE must be in operation.

 Start the server IONOS-NMS P5.5.


 Install a new IONOS-NMS Client P5.5 and run the client
 Check the database has been migrated correctly.
 Purge the logs (Fault Log and Event Log)
Note: An executable file is supplied to re-align the general parameters and the capability parameters
of Network Element (see section To audit a network element (NE)) after a migration.
- Launch the IONOS-NMS server
- Modify the value of SNMP time-out in the Preferences of NE ("SNMP
requests configuration for all NEs " in menu Tools/Preferences/NE). Put 2s
instead of 30s.
- In the directory chosen for installation (Ionos-NMS or /tools/IONOS-NMS by
default), select the bin folder.
- Run the command: ./run.sh ./bsh/align-NEs.bsh (solaris), then give the login
ad password of the user IONOS-NMS and the IP address of the server.
- Relaunch the server and set back the initial value of the SNMP time-out

1.5.4 - Database Management (Split & Merge)


Caution : Split/merge scripts and ORACLE database must run on the same machine

- Split and merge of databases can take a long (very long) time to do their job. It is possible to
follow them with the SplitMerge.log file which is in the same directory ( IONOSNMS/bin/SplitMerge).
- The SplitMerge.log file contains data about errors. Do not hesitate to consult the last lines.
- In the SplitMerge.log file, lines with the word "ERROR" are not necessarily errors.
- Split and merge work only with version 5.4 of IONOS-NMS database (or later).
- In the following text, the word "user" is used in the ORACLE way ( which is a IONOS-NMS
database ).
IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
Page 65/236

SYSTEM INSTALLATION AND MANAGEMENT


Note: An executable file is supplied to re-align the management table of Network Element in order to
update the IP address where the alarm traps must be sent(see 1.5.5 - Updating the traps managers
table of NEs after a merge or a split)

An example of split/merge scenario is available in Appendix Example of split/merge scenario


1.5.4.1 - To split a IONOS-NMS database

This command split the database used by IONOS-NMS in two IONOS-NMS databases
Split.sh (or .bat) extract a subnetwork from a IONOS-NMS database
Requirements :
- The Splited Subnetwork must not be connected to others subnetworks or Network-Elements.
- The Splited Subnetwork must have a unique name.
- The name of the Splited Subnetwork must contain only figures and\or letters :
- No spaces, neither of punctuation marks, nor special characters. It is necessary to respect
lowercase/uppercase letter.
- During a split, IONOS-NMS server must be stopped.
- Free space in the Oracle database must be sufficient.
For a split, the free space volume must be at least 2 times the size of the user to split.

The split makes two copies of the original user.


In the fist copy, it keeps only the subnetwork chosen.
In the second copy, it remove only the subnetwork chosen.
At the end we get two distinct Oracle "users" (database).

original "USER" (NMSSERVER):

Main View
/ | \
Sub_1 Sub_2 Sub_3

We start a split with the Sub_2 subnetwork


Split.bat DBNMS NMSSERVER nmssmn NMSSERVER_SPLIT_A NMSSERVER_SPLIT_B Sub_2
or
./split.sh DBNMS NMSSERVER nmssmn NMSSERVER_SPLIT_A NMSSERVER_SPLIT_B Sub_2
We get :
original "USER" (NMSSERVER):

Main View
/ | \
Sub_1 Sub_2 Sub_3

New User 1 (NMSSERVER_SPLIT_A):

Main View
|
Sub_2

New User 2 (NMSSERVER_SPLIT_B):

Main View
/
\
Sub_1 Sub_3

Notes :
-If some Network Elements are present in the main view, they will be present in the second User New User 2
(NMSSERVER_SPLIT_B) but not in the first one
-If some Network Elements are present in the "Unassigned Zone", they will be found in both "Users"
(NMSSERVER_SPLIT_A and NMSSERVER_SPLIT_B)
- If the subnetwork name is not unique, the split will fail.
1.5.4.2 - Split with Solaris
IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05
Page 66/236
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited

SYSTEM INSTALLATION AND MANAGEMENT


split.sh can be found in the directory ...IONOS-NMS/bin/SplitMerge
Log on as root.
# cd /tools/IONOS-NMS/bin/SplitMerge
Run the split [parameters] script.
./split.sh SID user_original password_original user_split_1 user_split_2 subnetwork_to_split
Indicate the following parameter values
SID

: SID (by default DBNMS)

user_original

: DB user to split (by default NMSSERVER)

password_original

: password of DB user to split (by default nmssmn)

user_split_1

: username of the first new split user

user_split_2
subnetwork_to_split

: username of the second new split user


: subnetwork to split

1.5.4.3 - Split with Windows

split.bat can be found in the directory ...IONOS-NMS/bin/SplitMerge


# cd C:\Program Files\IONOS-NMS\bin\SplitMerge
Run the split [parameters] script.
split.bat SID user_original password_original user_split_1 user_split_2 subnetwork_to_split
Indicate the following parameter values
SID

: SID (by default DBNMS)

user_original

: DB user to split (by default NMSSERVER)

password_original

: password of DB user to split (by default nmssmn)

user_split_1

: username of the first new split user

user_split_2
subnetwork_to_split

: username of the second new split user


: sub network to split

1.5.4.4 - To merge two IONOS-NMS databases

This command merge two databases used by IONOS-NMS in a new one.


Requirements :
- Both "users" to merge must have the same version number.
- The free available space volume must be at least equal to the sum of the two "users" sizes to merge.
- It is not possible to merge a user with itself.
- The " Unassigned" zones must be empty.( no NE or no Sub-network). If there are some elements in the
"Unassigned zone", it is possible to move them in a temporary sub-network.
Notes :
- Preferences, passwords ... for the new NMSSERVER_MERGED "user" are the ones from the
NMSSERVER_A "user"
- The merge process does not control the quantity of NEs. So you have to check if the quantity of NEs after
the merge is compatible with your license.
- The NE names in NMSSERVER_A "user" should not have a homonym in the NMSSERVER_B "user". The
same for M1400 names.
This script creates a new IONOS-NMS database with the two "users" defined in the parameters of the
command line

original "USER" 1 (NMSSERVER_A):

Main View
/ | \
Sub_1 Sub_2 Ne1

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
Page 67/236

SYSTEM INSTALLATION AND MANAGEMENT


original "USER" 2 (NMSSERVER_B):

Main View
/ | \
Sub_1 NeA NeB

New "USER" (NMSSERVER_MERGED):

Main View
/
\
Main View 1
Main View 2
/ | \
/
|
\
Sub_1 Sub_2 Ne1 Sub_1 NeA... NeB

We find the two original "users" as subnetworks in the new "user"


1.5.4.5 - Merge with Solaris

merge.sh can be found in the directory ...IONOS-NMS/bin/SplitMerge


Log on as root.
# cd /tools/IONOS-NMS/bin/SplitMerge
Run the merge [parameters] script.
./merge.sh SID user_A password_A user_B password_B merged_user
Indicate the following parameter values:
SID
: SID (by default DBNMS)
user_A
: first user to merge
password_A
: password of first user to merge
user_A
: second user to merge
password_A
: password of second user to merge
merged_user : merged user
1.5.4.6 - Merge with Windows

merge.bat can be found in the directory ...IONOS-NMS/bin/SplitMerge


# cd C:\Program Files\IONOS-NMS\bin\SplitMerge
Run the merge [parameters] script.
merge.bat SID user_A password_A user_B password_B merged_user
Indicate the following parameter values
SID
: SID (by default DBNMS)
user_A
: first user to merge
password_A
: password of first user to merge
user_A
: second user to merge
password_A
: password of second user to merge
merged_user : merged user

1.5.5 - Updating the traps managers table of NEs after a merge or a split
This command updates the traps managers tables in the NE if needed. It will replace an IP address by an
other in order to align the NE with the new IP address of the IONOS-NMS server

trapreceiverupdate.bsh gets all NEs in the IONOS-NMS database and update the traps manager
table of the NE if this is possible and if the NE are accessible
List of the NE which can be updated
ADR155c, ADR2500c, ADR2500extra, ADR 63E1, ADR155CCPE, ADR622, SLF-H, SLF-N
IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05
Page 68/236
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited

SYSTEM INSTALLATION AND MANAGEMENT

FSP3000
FMX GIES

On a SOLARIS server :
Launch the IONOS-NMS server (and wait the server is started)
# cd /tools/IONOS-NMS/bin
# ./run.sh ./bsh/trapreceiverupdate.bsh
log as admin and (password for admin)
Unused IP address: 111.112.113.114 (example)
Newer IP address: 192.168.10.88

On a WINDOWS server :
Launch the IONOS-NMS server (and wait the server is started)
> cd C:\Program Files\IONOS-NMS\bin
> run.bat ./bsh/trapreceiverupdate.bsh
log as admin and (password for admin)
Unused IP address: 111.112.113.114 (example)
Newer IP address: 192.168.10.88

1.6 - EMS-ADR DATABASE MANAGEMENT (ADR 10000)


1.6.1 - To backup the EMS-ADR database
In case of ADR10000 management, there is also a EMS-ADR database backup when a backup action is done
(from the menu of IONOS-NMS application or from the script command).
Notes :

(1) The FTP server must be launched as a preliminary on the machine used
like IONOS-NMS server.
(2) The backup is copied in the directory given in the file.xml file, which is
in the Config folder in the directory chosen for installation (backup directory
by default : c:\Program Files\Ionos-NMS\backup\db with Windows and
/data/IONOS-NMS/db-backup/server with Solaris).
The filename has the following format:
EMS-ADR-Server-Database-yyyy-mm-dd.zip with ADR10000 / EMS-ADR R7.2
And EMS-ADR-Server-Database-yyyy-mm-dd.dmp with ADR10000 / EMS-ADR
R8.1
EMS-ADR-Server-Database-yyyy-mm-dd--nn.zip or .dmp if several backups
are launched the same day.
The file with Windows and Solaris is copied in:
/yyyy/yyyy-mm/dd/yyyy-mm-ddnn.zip or dmp
yyyy-mm-dd is the date of backup launching and nn is the number of backup
in the day.

With ADR10000 / EMS-ADR R7.2:


The EMS-ADR database is also transferred to the EMS-ADR in the /sdh_home/ems/ENMConfig folder.
With ADR10000 / EMS-ADR R8.1:
The EMS-ADR database is also transferred to the Oracle zone of the EMS-ADR in the
/sdh_home/oracle10/backupdir folder.
Note: check that the backupdir folder exists or create it if necessary.

1.6.2 - To restore the EMS-ADR database in R7.2


IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
Page 69/236

SYSTEM INSTALLATION AND MANAGEMENT


This command restores the data used by EMS-ADR proxy application (backup data with Force Backup or
with the backup script).
Refer to the main document Element Management System for ADR Platforms N 253 216 157-A (chapt
2-3) Starting EMS-ADR from Client Windows section To start EMS-ADR start up configuration
Caution: Be sure that the EMS-ADR application is not working before to start the EMSADR in Start-up configuration. To stop the EMS-ADR application, open a Unix
window and perform the command: E.sh stop

From the START-UP configuration options window, choose:


From Backup copy
Click Restore from
Confirm the action of erase the exported log files
Select the EMS-ADR database to restore
Then, click Restore
Caution: After a EMS-ADR database restoration you have to set the Users
access rights

Refer to the main document Element Management System for ADR Platforms N 253 216 157-A (chapt
3-3) Managing users acces Editing users, and Adding new users
-

Edit the user admin, and set its password (to secret by default)

Add two users, operator with its associated password (private by default), and observer with its
associated password (public by default) in case of DB empty retoration.
Caution: The label of cross-connection are not recovered following a EMS-ADR
database restoration.
To restore cross-connection labels, launch an audit, select the
Crossconnections tab and click on the Global NMS to NE crossconnections reactivation button to launch the reactivation of all cross-connections in the NE.
From IONOS-NMS P5.4rev3 version, to restore cross-connection labels from the
EMS-ADR, select a NE and open the Shelf View, and on the menu bar select
System  Import XC. The XC labels of all NE will be restored.

1.6.3 - To restore the EMS-ADR database in R8.1


ADR10000 R8.1 can be managed from IONOS-NMS P5.4rev5 version.
Caution: Be sure that the EMS-ADR application is not working before to restore the
EMS-ADR database. To stop the EMS-ADR R8.1 application, open an Unix
window in the EMS-ADR zone and perform the command: ENMdown.sh stop

 To restore from the last backup, open an Unix window in the Oracle zone of the EMS-ADR and
perform the command from the home directory:
EmsDBRestore -d /sdh_home/oracle10/backupdir -f EMS_ADR_Server_Database.dmp -s
<schema_name>
e.g.:
[oracle10@z1-primepower ~] $ EmsDBRestore -d /sdh_home/oracle10/backupdir -f
EMS_ADR_Server_Database.dmp -s z2_primepower
<Schema_name> is the name of the schema that was backuped
In order to know the schema name, from the EMS-ADR zone with EMS user, type the SetupEMS command
and choose the option 1: the field Oracle DB user is the schema name.
Ex:
IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05
Page 70/236
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited

SYSTEM INSTALLATION AND MANAGEMENT


ems(z2-primepower) ~ > SetupEMS.sh
EMS XDM Oracle Setup Menu
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

Show Current Configuration


Check Oracle DB status
Apply Infrastructure Layer to DB
Insert EMS XDM schema to DB
Remove EMS XDM schema from DB
Empty EMS XDM Database data
Reconfigure EMS XDM Database settings

Select an action (q to quit) [1...7,q] --> 1


Database Settings:
Database Server:
10.66.220.52
Oracle DB user:
z2_primepower is the schema name
Oracle service name: z2_primepower

 To restore a previous EMS-ADR database saved, open an Unix window in the IONOS-NMS
zone, and from the backup directory perform the following command in order to copy the EMSADR database file in the correct place before to restore it:
Example of procedure (using the scp command):
# scp EMS-ADR-Server-Database-YYYY-MM-DD-000n.dmp
oracle10@10.66.220.52:/sdh_home/oracle10/backupdir/EMS_ADR_Server_Database.dmp
EMS-ADR-Server-Database-YYYY-MM-DD-000n.dmp is the EMS-ADR database file stored into the /data/IONOSNMS/backup/server/yyyy/yyyy-mm/dd folder of the IONOS-NMS server.
oracle10 is the login (Oracle zone of the EMS-ADR), you must enter the password later.
10.66.220.52 is the IP address of the Oracle10 zone of the EMS-ADR.
/sdh_home/oracle10/backupdir/ is the path to copy the file
EMS_ADR_Server_Database.dmp is the name of the destination file. It is mandatory to respect this syntax name of the
destination file.
Note (1) : In case of Backup 1+1 secure (see 9.2.13 - Backup 1+1 of IONOS NMS
servers (Option), to restore the EMS-ADR database, you have to copy the file (
.dmp) from the EMS-ADR zone to the Oracle10 zone of EMS-ADR server.
Also, you must perform the command of database restoration using the "-n
new_schema_name " optional flag.
Example of procedure (using the scp command):
From the EMS-ADR zone into the ENMConfig directory, enter the command:
scp File_source Login_destination@Ip_destination:/Rep_destination/File
e.g.:
#scp EMS-ADR-Server-Database-2010-06-04-0002.backup.dmp
oracle10@10.66.220.52:/sdh_home/oracle10/backupdir/EMS_ADR_Server_Database.dmp
EMS-ADR-Server-Database-YYYY-MM-DD-000n.dmp is the EMS-ADR database
file stored into the /sdh_home/ems/ENMConfig folder of the EMS-ADR zone.
Oracle10 is the login (Oracle zone of the EMS-ADR), you must enter the
password later.
10.66.220.52 is the IP address of the Oracle10 zone of the EMS-ADR
/sdh_home/oracle10/backupdir/ is the path to copy the file.
EMS_ADR_Server_Database.dmp is the name of the destination file. It is
mandatory to respect this syntax name of the destination file.
IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
Page 71/236

SYSTEM INSTALLATION AND MANAGEMENT


Note (2) : Also, in case of Backup 1+1 secure see 9.2.13 - Backup 1+1 of IONOS NMS
servers (Option) , you must perform the command of database restoration
using the "-n new_schema_name " optional flag.

 To restore a database coming from an other server / zone, open an Unix window in the Oracle
zone of the EMS-ADR and perform the command from the home directory:
EmsDBRestore -d /sdh_home/oracle10/backupdir -f EMS_ADR_Server_Database.dmp -s
<schema_name> -n new_schema_name
with
<schema_name> is the name of the schema that you will restore into the current schema
<new_schema_name> is the name of the current schema.
e.g.:
[oracle10@z1-M3000 ~] $ EmsDBRestore -d /sdh_home/oracle10/backupdir -f
EMS_ADR_Server_Database.dmp -s z2_primepower n z2_M3000

1.7 - TO SAVE THE EQUIPMENT DATABASES (EXCEPT METERING)


The backup of equipment database is started on Server IONOS-NMS.
 In the directory chosen for installation (Ionos-NMS or /tools/IONOS-NMS by default), select the bin
folder.
 Run the command : eqpt-backup <login> / <password> start
For example eqpt-backup admin/secret start (with wIndows )
For example /tools/IONOS-NMS/bin/eqpt-backup admin/secret start (with solaris)
The database of all equipment will be uploaded once.
The backup can be interrupted by the following command :
eqpt-backup <login>/<password> stop
For example eqpt-backup admin/secret stop (with windows)
For example /tools/IONOS-NMS/bin/eqpt-backup admin/secret stop (with Solaris)
This command stops the uploads, but the current upload is finished.
The launching of the same command :
eqpt-backup <login>/<password> start
the uploads will be continue, beginning with the first equipment which has not been uploaded.
In the case where the upload is finished, the command stop has no effect.
In the case where the upload is in progress, the command start has no effect.
The backup files are stored :
- on PC in the folder \backup\eqpt of directory chosen for the installation (c:\Program Files\Ionos-NMS by
default).
- on UNIX in the directory /data/IONOS-NMS/db-backup/eqpt.
Note : This backup is available for ADR155C-P2.6, FOTC, ADR155C (release P3 / P4 /P5),
ADR155CPE, ADR155E, ADR63E1, ADR2500C, ADR2500 EXTRA, ADR1000, EXT155HA and
FSP3000.

1.8 - TO EXPORT EQUIPMENT INVENTORY IN A FILE XML


The export of inventory equipment is launched on the Server IONOS-NMS.
 In the directory chosen for installation (Ionos-NMS or /tools/IONOS-NMS by default), select the
bin folder.
Or

 Run the command : xmlexport <login> / <password> <file name> <export.xml>


xmlexport <login> / <password> <file name> <exportComplete.xml> (4)

For example xmlexport admin/secret file.xml export.xml (with Windows )


IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05
Page 72/236
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited

SYSTEM INSTALLATION AND MANAGEMENT


For example /tools/IONOS-NMS/bin/xmlexport admin/secret file.xml export.xml (with solaris)
The file name with its path (2) must be given. By default the file is created in the bin folder.
The export of inventory allows to list :
- the boards present in equipment
- the software associated to boards
Notes : (1)The path has not to contain "blank".
(2)The export of inventory equipment uses a file of configuration export.xml (in folder
Config/xmlexport). This file can be modified.
(3)This export is available for ADR155C (release P3 / P4 /P5), ADR2500C, ADR155CPE, ADR63E1,
ADR2500 EXTRA, ADR622, ADR10000, EXT155HA., Sagem-Link, SLF-v1, SLF-N, SLF-H, 3P@C
4400, 3P@C 4450, 3P@C 4900, FSP2000 and FSP3000.
(4)The exportComplete is only available for SLF-v1, SLF-N and SLF-H. This is a detailed equipment
inventory.

1.9 - TO EXPORT EQUIPMENT INVENTORY IN A FILE TXT


The export of inventory equipment is launched on the Server IONOS-NMS.
 In the directory chosen for installation (Ionos-NMS or /tools/IONOS-NMS by default), select the bin
folder.
 Run the command : inventoryexport <login> / <password> <file name>
For example inventoryexport admin/secret file.txt (with Windows )
For example /tools/IONOS-NMS/bin/inventoryrexport admin/secret file.txt (with solaris)
The file name with its path (2) must be given. By default the file is created in the Bin folder.
The export of inventory allows to list :
- the boards present in equipment
- the software associated to boards
The file can be visualized with a spreadsheet.
Note : (1) The server IONOS-NMS must be started
(2) The path has not to contain "blank".
(3) This export is available for ADR155C (release P3 / P4 / P5), ADR2500C, ADR155CPE,
ADR63E1, ADR2500 EXTRA, EXT155HA, ADR622, Sagem-Link, SLF-v1, SLF-N, SLF-H,
3P@C 4048, 3P@C 4400, 3P@C 4450, FSP2000 and FSP3000.
(4) The action may last a long time according to the number of Network elements

1.10 - TO EXPORT DETAILED EQUIPMENT INVENTORY IN A FILE TXT


The export of detailed inventory equipment is launched on the Server IONOS-NMS. It's only availble for SLFv1, SLF-N, SLF-H equipments.
 In the directory chosen for installation (Ionos-NMS or /tools/IONOS-NMS by default), select the bin
folder.
 Run the command : inventoryexportSLF <login> / <password> <file name>
For example inventoryexportSLF admin/secret file.txt (with Windows )
For example /tools/IONOS-NMS/bin/inventoryrexportSLF admin/secret file.txt (with solaris)
The file name with its path (2) must be given. By default the file is created in the Bin folder.
The export of detailed inventory allows to list :
- the boards present in equipment
- the software associated to boards
- the type of link
- the static ODU configuration
- the ODU parameters
- the channel used
- the IDU parameters
IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
Page 73/236

SYSTEM INSTALLATION AND MANAGEMENT


- the RSL
The file can be visualized with a spreadsheet.
Note : (1) The server IONOS-NMS must be started
(2) The path has not to contain "blank".
(3) This export is available for SLF-v1, SLF-H and
SLF-N.
(4) The action may last a long time according to the number of Network elements

1.11 - ALARMS RESYNCHRONIZATION OF IONOS-NMS FOR THE SERVER


NETCOOL
In case of use of a server Micromuse of Netcool, it is possible to launch a resynchronization of alarms
for the alarms present on IONOS-NMS.
 In the directory chosen for installation (by default Ionos-NMS on Windows or /tools/IONOS-NMS under
Solaris), select the bin folder.
 Run the command : omnibus <login> / <pasword> resynchro
For example /tools/IONOS-NMS/bin/omnibus admin/secret resynchro (under Solaris)

1.12 - TO RUN THE FORCE POLLING SCRIPT


This script is used to perform a Force Polling to all equipments of the network.
It must be run from the IONOS-NMS server.
 In the directory chosen for installation (Ionos-NMS or /tools/IONOS-NMS by default), select the
bin folder.
 Run the command : run.bat ./bsh/forcepolling.bsh (with Windows)
Or
 Run the command : ./run.sh ./bsh/forcepolling.bsh (with Solaris)
ex:
# ./run.sh ./bsh/forcepolling.bsh
Logging into secure dsServer, please enter the following ...
User name: admin
Password: secret
****************FSP3000 : FSP46****************
force polling on FSP46
Result force polling on FSP46: Timeout
****************FSP2000 : nemi****************
force polling on nemi
Response from nemi
****************FSP3000 : FSP44****************
force polling on FSP44
Response from FSP44
****************ADR155C : Paris****************
force polling on Paris
Response from Paris

1.13 - TO RUN THE ALIGN-NES SCRIPT

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


Page 74/236
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited

SYSTEM INSTALLATION AND MANAGEMENT


This script is used to re-align the General parameters and the Capability parameter to all Network
Equipments after a migration or an Oracle database merge. (See chapters To migrate a database and
To Merge two IONOS-NMS databases)
It is possible to activate or not a test of accessibility to the Network Elements.
To activate the test of NE accessibility in order to accelerate the process of re-alignment:
 In the directory chosen for installation (Ionos-NMS or /tools/IONOS-NMS by default), select the
bin/bsh folder.
 In this folder, open the file align-NEs.bsh and replace the line:
boolean testAccessibility = false;
by
boolean testAccessibility = true;
 Save and close the file align-NEs.bsh.
Caution: After the restart of the Ionos-NMS server, it is necessary to wait the end of the polling towards all
NEs before to run the script (the control of the NEs accessibility is done from the Oracle database)

To run the script:


 In the directory chosen for installation (Ionos-NMS or /tools/IONOS-NMS by default), select the
bin folder.
 Run the command : run.bat ./bsh/align-NEs.bsh (with Windows)
Or
 Run the command : ./run.sh ./bsh/align-NEs.bsh (with Solaris)
Then give the login and password of the user Ionos-NMS and the IP addres of the server.
ex:
# ./run.sh ./bsh/align-NEs.bsh
User name: admin
Password: secret
Host: 10.66.212.122
Logging in as 'admin' on 10.66.212.122
Aligning NE 'Paris' of type ADR155C
- general parameters
Failed to align general parameters! : NE is inaccessible
- capability parameters
Failed to align capability parameters! : NE is inaccessible
Aligning NE 'Nice' of type ADR155C
- general parameters
- capability parameters
Aligning NE 'Lyon of type ADR155C
- general parameters
Failed to align general parameters! : NE is inaccessible
...
- capability parameters
Aligning NE 'Brest' of type ADR155C
- general parameters
- capability parameters
Maintenance finished!
logging of!

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
Page 75/236

TOPOLOGY MANAGEMENT

2. TOPOLOGY MANAGEMENT
2.1 - INTRODUCTION
Topology administration involves in managing the physical elements of the sub-networks.
This consists in:


creating and positioning the sub-networks and its network elements on a geographic map
with the corresponding optional administrative information.

creating links between these elements with the corresponding optional administrative
information.

The topology function enables creating any type of sub-network hierarchy. Elementary sub-networks
can thus be moved within a main sub-network with the possibility for creating any type of structure.

2.2 - TOPOLOGY VIEW

WINDOW

The Topology View window displays the network map and provides access to the network editing and
administration functions.

Figure 2.1 : Topology Main View

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


Page 76/236
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited

TOPOLOGY MANAGEMENT
The Topology View window comprises 5 parts:
 a menus bar, which gives access to the main function menus of the software: File, Edit, Creation,
Action, Tools, Help.
 Use the File menu to perform a backup on line, change password.(except for Ldap users) or
exit the Customer Application
 Use the Edit menu to modify data: copy/cut, delete, rename, properties on the various
objects.
 Use the View menu to display the various views: Topology View, Log View, NML View and
Admin View.
 Use the Creation menu to create a Sub-network, a Network element (NE), an STM-n link, an
Ethernet Link, a VCGroup, an Ethernet service, a WDM link, a WDM Trail.
 Use the Action to run the various actions associated to each object.
 Uses the Tools menu to define the preferences or access the Software Management.
 Use the Help menu to get help or to determine the application version.
 a tools bar (under the menu bar), which gives access to the editing functions: create, cut, copy,
paste, delete, show properties.
 Use the first icon on the left in the tools bar to create a sub-network, a network element (NE,
VNE) an STM-n link, an Ethernet Link, a VCGroup, an Ethernet service, a WDM Link, a
WDM Trail.


Use the icon "Locks/unlocks the map and tree views" to lock the Topology view and to
prevent any displacement of icon.

Select the "Layer" ("all", "WDM", "SDH", "Ethernet" or "Others") to display the topology view :
only the links belonging to selected layer are displayed. The list of available layers depend
on the type of license.

 an explorer (left window, below the tools bar) to obtain the list of sub-networks and network elements.
 Use the explorer to locate, select or move an object: each object is animated in accordance
with the alarms present (see 5 :ALARMS MANAGEMENT).
 a network elements view (right window, below the tools bar)
 Use this window to locate, select edit or move and NE: each object is animated in
accordance with the alarms present (see 5 : ALARMS MANAGEMENT).
 a current alarms window at the bottom of the screen.
 Use this window to display the current alarms (acknowledged or not, or filtered) received
from the network elements.

Notes:

The user name is displayed in the title bar.


In the Topology View, several sub-networks can be displayed in different
windows (button at top right of window).
By clicking the mouse right button on the icon of a sub-network or a network
element (NE) in the Topology View or in the explorer, a pop-up menu
containing the functions of the tools bar is displayed.
To access a sub-network or a network element, double-click on the
corresponding icons in the Topology View.

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
Page 77/236

TOPOLOGY MANAGEMENT

2.3 - SUB-NETWORK ADMINISTRATION


2.3.1 - To create a sub-network
This procedure is used to add a new sub-network and place it in the sub-network hierarchy (explorer): a
sub-network continues to be a container for the standard sub-networks and for the network elements
(NE).
 In the explorer, select Main View or another sub-network.
 In the menus bar, select Creation > Sub-network : the Create Sub-network window is displayed.

Figure 2.2 : Window Create sub-network (1)

 In this window, in the Name field, enter a single, mandatory name with no more than 40 characters
for the sub-network.
 Select the type of sub-network (default value), ADR2500/1 ADR63E1, ADR2500/2 ADR63E1,
custom1, custom2, custom3, custom4, custom5.
 Click [Browse] to select a background image for the sub-network.
 Click [Remove] to remove the background image, already selected.
 Click [Finish] if you have finished or [Next] if you want to customize certain data: the following screen
is displayed.

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


Page 78/236
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited

TOPOLOGY MANAGEMENT

Figure 2.3 : Window Create sub-network (2)


 In the Customer name field, indicate the customer name (40 characters max.). In the Location
field, indicate the location (40 characters max.), and in the Info field, indicate any other
necessary information (80 characters max.).
 Click [Previous] if you want to return to the previous screen or [Finish] if you have finished: The
results window Creation subnetwork action results qui suit s'affiche.

Figure 2.4 : Window Create sub-network (3)


 Click [Finish] : the new icon for the sub-network will appear in both the explorer and in the Topology
View window.

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
Page 79/236

TOPOLOGY MANAGEMENT
Notes:

In this window, the Creation Date", Last Modification Date and User
Name fields are automatically updated.
The customized data are saved in the database and can be modified by
selecting the Properties function (Edit menu or pop-up menu).
In the Topology View window, the name is displayed below the sub-network
icon.
The icon of the sub-network will take the color corresponding to maximum
severity of alarm for all NEs and sub-networks which it contains.
the point of exclamation indicates that the sub-network contains at least
one disaligned NE or a disaligned sub-network;
the question mark indicates that the sub-network contains at least one
potentially disaligned NE or a potentially disaligned sub-network, other NEs
and sub-networks being aligned.

2.3.2 - To display/modify the properties of a sub-network

 In the explorer or in the Topology View (Figure 2.1), click left on the sub-network to be displayed or
modified.
 In the pop-up menu, select Properties : the Sub-network properties window is displayed with three
tabs.

Figure 2.5 : Window Sub-network properties / General


IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05
Page 80/236
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited

TOPOLOGY MANAGEMENT

 Use this window to modify the unique and mandatory name (60 characters max.).
 Click [Browse] if you want to change the network background image.
 Click [Remove] if you want to remove the selected background image.
 Click [Finish] if you have finished or click on the Additional Info tab if you want to display or modify
customized data: in this case, the following Sub-network properties window is displayed.

Figure 2.6 : Window Sub-network properties / Additional information

 In the Customer name field, indicate the customer name (60 characters max.); in the Location
field, indicate the location (60 characters max.), and in the Info field, any other necessary
information (80 characters max.).
 Click [Apply] to validate the modification: a results window is displayed.
 Click [Finish] if you have finished or click on the Alarms tab if you want to display the list of alarms of
the NE present in the sub-network.

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
Page 81/236

TOPOLOGY MANAGEMENT

Figure 2.7 : Window Sub-network properties / Alarms


Notes :

In this window, the Creation Date", Last Modification Date and User
Name fields are automatically updated.
In the Topology View window (Figure 2.1), the name is displayed below the
sub-network icon.
It is possible to display the properties of an alarm: select the alarm in the
alarms table and click right to bring up the pop-up menu. Select properties
.

2.3.3 - To move a sub-network


 In the explorer or Topology View (Figure 2.1), click left on the sub-network to be moved.
 In the pop-up menu, select Cut.
 Click left on the sub-network to which you want to move the selected sub-network.
 In the pop-up menu, select Paste : the sub-network selected is pasted to the target sub-network.
Notes:

The links and the network elements are preserved in the sub-network which
has been moved.
You can also use the Drag and Drop technique to move a sub-network to
another sub-network.

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


Page 82/236
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited

TOPOLOGY MANAGEMENT
2.3.4 - To delete a sub-network
Caution : This operation is only allowed provided the sub-network is empty.

In the Explorer or in the Topology View (Figure 2.1),, click left on the sub-network to be deleted.

 In the pop-up menu, select Delete : a confirmation message is displayed.


 Click [Yes] to validate the deletion.

2.3.5 - To rename a sub-network


 In the Explorer or in the Topology View (Figure 2.1),, click left on the sub-network to be renamed.
 In the pop-up menu, select Rename.
 Enter a new name in the editing field.

2.3.6 - To change the sub-network background image


 In the Explorer or in the Topology View (Figure 2.1), select a sub-network.
 In the pop-up menu, select Properties : the Properties window is displayed.
 Click [Browse] : the following window is displayed.

Figure 2.8 : Window Open


 Using the Look in field, select the folder containing the image.
 Select the type of file : *.gif, *.jpg, *.jpeg or *.png and the image file.
 Click [Open] to validate the change of image.
 Click [Finish] to validate the modification

2.3.7 - To delete the sub-network background image


 In the Explorer or in the Topology View (Figure 2.1), select a sub-network
 In the pop-up menu, select Properties : the Properties window is displayed
 Click [Remove]
 Click [Finish] to validate

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
Page 83/236

TOPOLOGY MANAGEMENT

2.4 - ADMINISTRATION OF NETWORK ELEMENTS (NE, VNE)


2.4.1 - To create a network element
This procedure is used to add a new network element (NE or VNE) and to position it in the sub-network
hierarchy (explorer).
 In the Explorer or in the Topology View (Figure 2.1), select a sub-network.
 In the menus bar, select Creation > NE : the Create a Network Element window is displayed.

Figure 2.9 : Window Create a network element (1)


 Use the fields as follows:


Name to enter the mandatory name (60 characters max.) The name can contain any
alphabetical character except the accentuated alphabetical characters (except if the
configuration of the server allows it - 1.2.3.7 -) , numbers or spaces.

Note: For a NE type ADR10000, the length of the name is 31 characters max. The Space character is
not allowed.

M1400 name to enter the type M1400 name which comprises a city name (mandatory
name with 12 characters max.) and a suffix (3 characters) : the suffix does not need to be
filled in. The name of city can contain not accentuated alphabetical characters, numbers or
spaces (if configuration of the customer allows it - 1.2.4.4 -). The suffix contains only
numbers.

Type to enter the equipment type : ADR155C, ADR155CPE, ADR155E, ADR2500C,


ADR2500 EXTRA, ADR622, ADR10000HN, ADR10000, FOT155A, FOT155C, ADR155C P2,
ADR63E1, VNE, FMX, Sagem-Link, Sagem-Link Light, Sagem-Link 2, SLF-v1, SLA, SLF-N,
SLF-H, SLT, SLF-A ,FSP2000, FSP3000, Sagem DTX, SHDSL, 3P@C4048, 3P@C4400,
3P@C4450, 3P@C4900, IP equipment, XP3000.

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


Page 84/236
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited

TOPOLOGY MANAGEMENT


IP address to enter the IP address (not used for a VNE): if the network element has not
been installed, it will be viewed as inaccessible by IONOS-NMS.

Under Proxy must be activated if the chosen Type of NE is FMX and if it is under a
proxy (board GIEP). In this case, enter the Equip No .

Secondary IP addresses to enter the secondary IP addresses (up to 4 max.; not used
for a VNE or a FMX): to add a new address, click [Add], to delete one, click [Delete].

Figure 2.10 : Window Create NE / Secondary IP Address)




Poll interval to enter the polling interval (by default, 10 min.- 7.2.3 -): in seconds,
minutes or hours. This duration is used to adjust the time interval between two polling
operations to detect any inaccessibility (not valid for a VNE): the value 0 implies that the NE
is not polled.
A value lower than 10 min is not recommended.

 Click [Next] when you have filled in the fields: the data customization window is displayed.

Figure 2.11 : Window Create a network element (2)


 In the Customer name field, indicate the customer name (40 characters max.); in the Location
field, indicate the location (40 characters max.), and in the Info field, enter any other necessary
information (200 characters max.).
 Click [Previous] if you want to return to the previous screen or [Next] to go to the next screen.
Note:

In this window, the Creation Date , Last Modification Date and User
Name fields are automatically updated.

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
Page 85/236

TOPOLOGY MANAGEMENT

Figure 2.12 : Window Create a network element (3)


 Use the SNMP Community field to define the SNMP community. Use the Password fields to
define the equipment passwords for the three types of users: supervisor, operator and observer. By
clicking [Default values], the default values defined in the NE preferences are automatically
assigned for each type of NE.(see 7.2.3 -)

Notes :

The "SNMP community" is used to access the equipment by SNMP.


The 3 passwords are used to access the equipment by HTTP browser.
The community and passwords must correspond to those stored in the
equipment; otherwise, it will not be accessible by the IONOS-NMS manager:
the passwords can be modified in the equipment using the SNMP View menu.
see 2.4.13 - To display and modify the SNMP parameters
For a FMX, enter "bmx" for the community and the three passwords.
For a Sagem-Link or a Sagem-Link Light, enter "private" for community,
"passwd4" for the password SUPERVISOR, "passwd2" for password
OPERATOR and OBSERVER.
For a Sagem-Link 2 or a SLF-v1 enter "public" for community, "2345" for the
password SUPERVISOR, "1234" for password OPERATOR and "0" for
password OBSERVER.
For a SLA, enter "private" for community, and "admin" for the passwords.
For a SLF-N enter "secret" for community, "2345" for the password
SUPERVISOR, "1234" for password OPERATOR and "0" for password
OBSERVER.
For a SLF-H enter "secret" for community, "2345" for the password
SUPERVISOR, "1234" for password OPERATOR and "0" for password
OBSERVER.

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


Page 86/236
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited

TOPOLOGY MANAGEMENT
For a FSP2000 or a FSP3000, enter "private" for community, "private" for the
password SUPERVISOR, "private" for password OPERATOR and "public" for
password OBSERVER.
For an equipment SHDSL, enter "private" for community, "super" for
password SUPERVISOR and OPERATOR, "observ" for password OBSERVER.
Use on IONOS the users "Superviser" and "observer" or create a user
"admin" on equipment SHDSL.
For an equipment DSLAM, enter "secret" for community, "secret" for
password SUPERVISOR, enter "private" for password OPERATOR, "public"
for password OBSERVER.
For an equipment ADR155E enter public for community. For an equipment
ADR10000HN, enter "private" for community. For both types, enter "secret"
for password SUPERVISOR, "private" for password OPERATOR and "public"
for password OBSERVER.
Caution : The Security window is not taken into account for a NE type ADR10000.
If the admin password has been changed from the EMS-ADR, it must be
updated from the PREFERENCES MANAGEMENT (7.2.3 -To change the
default properties of the Nes): In the Default community passwords section,
set the new Password SUPERVISOR for ADR10000 NE type. It will be common
for all ADR10000 in the network.

a/ Click [Create NE] to validate the NE creation for an ADR155C, ADR63E1, ADR155CPE,
ADR155E, ADR2500C, ADR2500 EXTRA, ADR622, ADR10000HN, ADR10000, SLF-A, FSP2000 or
a FSP3000. The results window Create a network element (4) is displayed.

Figure 2.13 : Window Create a network element (4)


And click [Finish] to finish the operation.

Notes :

When the network element (type ADR155C , ADR63E1, ADR155CPE,


ADR155E, ADR2500C, ADR2500 EXTRA, ADR622, ADR10000HN, ADR10000,
FMX with board GIES, SLF-N, SLF-H, SLF-A, FSP2000 or FSP3000) is created
and is accessible, the IONOS-NMS manager reads the useful information in
the equipment and saves it in the database.
For a NE of type ADR, ADR2500 EXTRA, ADR10000HN, FMX with board GIES,
SLF-N or FSP3000 the manager updates the general parameters in the
equipment : the name of NE (long name), the table of traps (Traps Manager
Dest/IP adress of IONOS-NMS Server), and the variable of traps sending (Logs
Traps Enable). The name of NE is not always updated in according to the
configuration used in the server (see 1.2.3.7 -). A time set is done
automatically on the NE (with time of Server IONOS-NMS excepted for
ADR155E and ADR10000HN).
For the IONOS-NMS server to receive the traps of the equipment FSP2000
which has just been created, the traps table in the equipment must be
updated with the server IP address. To do so, use the TPI.

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
Page 87/236

TOPOLOGY MANAGEMENT
For a ADR622, the managed cards are: TSI, CCU-622, CTRL-622, AUX-622,
GFP150-622, GFP2500-2GE, GE-DM, 2XSTM1-SFP, 42E1, 42E1FA, 3E3DS3,
3E3DS3FA, LTUE120P, LTUE75P, LTU3E3DS3-622, FAN622 and STM1/4
Caution: in the case of use of Proxy HTTP, to guarantee the access security to
the equipment, it is possible to update with browser HTTP the table of
managers address IP in each NE created of type ADR155C, ADR63E1,
ADR155CPE, ADR2500C, ADR2500 EXTRA or ADR622: to add IP address of
the server in the table of the managers with rights "Supervisor".
In the Topology View Figure 2.1, and in the explorer, the icon of the NE
created is displayed in the color corresponding to its alarm degree and with
its name written below:
The exclamation point means that the equipment is misaligned;
The question mark means that the equipment is potentially misaligned.
The icon of the sub-network will take the color corresponding to
degree of all NEs and sub-networks which it contains.

alarm

the point of exclamation indicates that the sub-network contains at least


one disaligned NE or a disaligned sub-network;
the question mark indicates that the sub-network contains at least one
potentially disaligned NE or a potentially disaligned sub-network, other NEs
and sub-networks being aligned.

b/ Click [Next] for a VNE, a FOT155A, a FOT155C, a FMX, a Sagem-Link, a Sagem-Link Light, a
Sagem-Link 2, a SLF-v1, SLA, SLF-N, SLF-A, Sagem DTX, SHDSL, DSLAM, IP equipment or an
ADR155C P2. The following window is displayed.

Figure 2.14 : Window Create a network element (5)

 Use this window to define the NE resources: click [Add container] or [Add Interface] to respectively
add a container or an interface to the network element created (only valid for FOT155A, FOT155C,
IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05
Page 88/236
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited

TOPOLOGY MANAGEMENT
ADR155C P2, FMX, Sagem-Link, Sagem-Link Light, Sagem-Link 2, SLF-v1, SLA, SLF-N, SLF-H,
SLF-A , Sagem DTX, SHDSL, IP equipment, DSLAM and VNE).

Notes :

The [Add Container] button is used to create:


. a rack after having selected an NE/VNE,
. a shelf after having selected a rack ,
. a card after having selected a shelf .
The [Add Interface] button is used to add:
. a rack , a shelf , a card and an interface under card after
having selected an NE/VNE,
. a shelf , a card and an interface under card after having
selected a rack ,
. a card and an interface under card after having selected a
shelf .
. an interface under card after having selected a card .

 Click [Create NE] to validate the creation. The results window Create a network element (6) is
displayed.

Figure 2.15 : Window Create a network element (6)


And click [Finish] to finish the operation.

Caution : When the network element (type FOTC, ADR155C P2, FMX, Sagem-Link,
Sagem-Link Light, Sagem-Link 2, SLF-v1, SLF-N, SLF-H, SLA, Sagem DTX,
SHDSL, DSLAM, IP equipment ) is created and accessible, the IONOS-NMS
manager reads the useful information in the equipment.
For the IONOS-NMS server to receive the traps of the equipment which has
just been created, the traps table in the equipment must be updated with the
server IP address. To do so, use the HTTP browser or the TPI.

FMX-GIES (1) : For a FMX-GIES, to get the inventory of Ethernet board, it is necessary to
create and fill the c:\Program Files\Ionos-NMS\tpifmx\backup\carteETH.lst file.
See below,

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
Page 89/236

TOPOLOGY MANAGEMENT
One line per board, with :
<long name of FMX>=<slot number>,ETH
Example of carteETH.lst file:

FMX5=3,ETH
FMX6=4,ETH
FMX7=3,ETH

Otherwise, the Ethernet Boards are indicated as empty in Ionos-NMS.

(2) At the end of FMX-GIES creation, a NE database backup is done in order to


get the inventory.

2.4.2 - To copy a network element (NE, VNE)


 In the explorer or in the Topology View, click left on the network element to be copied.
 In the pop-up menu, select Copy.
 Click left on the sub-network to which you want to copy the selected network element.
 In the pop-up menu, select Paste : the network element selected is copied to the target sub-network
and the Create NE window is displayed.
 Perform the same procedures used to create a network element ( 2.4.1 -.)
Note :

Except for the network element type, all the parameters of the new network
element can be modified.

2.4.3 - To move a network element (NE, VNE)


 In the explorer or in the Topology View (Figure 2.1), click left on the network element to be moved.
 In the pop-up menu, select Cut.
 Click left on the sub-network to which you want to move the selected network element.
 In the pop-up menu, select Paste : the network element selected is pasted to the target sub-network.
Notes :

The links of the network element moved are preserved.


You can also use the Drag and Drop technique to move a network
element.

2.4.4 - To delete a network element (NE, VNE)


Caution :

This operation is only allowed provided the resources (trails, links) of the
network element are not used.

 In the explorer or in the Topology View (Figure 2.1), click left on the network element to be deleted.
 In the pop-up menu, select Delete : a confirmation message is displayed.
 Click [Yes] to validate the deletion.
Note :

When the operation is confirmed, the data of the network element are deleted
from the database.

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


Page 90/236
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited

TOPOLOGY MANAGEMENT
If the element is not managed by the IONOS-NMS, the traps table in the
equipment must be updated by removing the IP address from the server. Use
the HTTP browser for this purpose.

2.4.5 - To rename a network element (NE, VNE)


 In the explorer or in the Topology View (Figure 2.1), click left on the network element to be renamed.


In the pop-up menu, select Rename.

 Enter a new name in the editing field ( any alphabetical character except the accentuated alphabetical
characters, numbers and spaces).

2.4.6 - To display and modify the properties of a network element


 In the explorer or in the Topology View (Figure 2.1), click left on the network element to be displayed
and modified.
 In the pop-up menu, select Properties : the NE Properties window is displayed.

Figure 2.16 : Window Network Element properties


 a/ Select the General tab if you want to modify:


the name (60 characters max.). This name can contain any alphabetical character except the
accentuated alphabetical characters (except if the configuration of the server allows it -
1.2.3.7 -), numbers or spaces.

the unique M1400 name, which comprises a city name (12 characters) and a suffix (3
characters) : the suffix does not need to be filled in. The name of city can contain not
accentuated alphabetical characters, numbers or spaces (if configuration of the customer
allows it - 1.2.4.4 -). The suffix contains only numbers.




the equipment type cannot be modified.


the IP address (not used for a VNE): if the network element has not been installed
beforehand, it will be inaccessible.
IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
Page 91/236

TOPOLOGY MANAGEMENT


The Equip.No for a FMX with card GIEP.

the secondary IP addresses (up to 4 max., not used for a VNE). To add a new address, click
[Add].

the polling interval (by default, 10 min - 1.2.3.3 -) : in seconds, minutes or hours. This
duration is used to adjust the time interval between two polling operations to detect NE
inaccessibility (not valid for a VNE): the value 0 implies that the NE will not be polled.

b/ Select the Additional Information tab to customize certain data (see 2.4.1 - Creation of a
network element).

c/ Select the Security tab to modify the equipment community and equipment passwords for the
three types of users (supervisor, operator and observer) in the Password fields (see 2.4.1 Creation of a network element).

d/ Select the Alarms tab to display all the alarms of NE.

Figure 2.17 : Window Network Element properties / Alarms

e/ Select the Inventory tab to read/modify the inventory:




Click [Add container] to add a container (only valid for FOT155A, FOT155C, ADR155 P2,
FMX, Sagem-Link, Sagem-Link Light, Sagem-Link 2, SLF-v1, SLA, SLF-N, SLF-H, SLF-A,
Sagem DTX, SHDSL, DSLAM, IP equipment and VNE).

Click [Add Interface] to add an interface to the network elements (only valid for FOT155A,
FOT155C, ADR155 P2, FMX, Sagem-Link, Sagem-Link Light, Sagem-Link 2, SLF-v1, SLA,
SLF-N, SLF-H, SLF-A, Sagem DTX, SHDSL, DSLAM, IP equipment and VNE) (see 2.4.1 Creation of a network element).

Click [Add Interface] to add an interface of type "OTHER" on any card (valid for all type of
NE).

 Click [Apply] to validate the modifications.


Notes :

In the Topology View, the name is displayed below the NE icon, whereas the
M1400 name is only displayed when the mouse pointer is placed on the icon.
The NE can also be selected in NML View.

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


Page 92/236
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited

TOPOLOGY MANAGEMENT

2.4.7 - To modify the M1400 name of a network element (NE, VNE)

 In the explorer or in the Topology View (Figure 2.1), click left on the network element to be modified.
 In the pop-up menu, select Properties : the NE Properties window is displayed.

Figure 2.18 : Window Network Element properties


 Select the General tab and modify the M1400 name :


the unique M1400 name comprises a city name (12 characters) and a suffix (3 characters) :
the suffix does not need to be filled in. The name of city can contain not accentuated
alphabetical characters, numbers or spaces (if configuration of the customer allows it - 1.2.4.4
-). The suffix contains only numbers.

 Click [Apply] to validate the modifications.


 If Links (STM-n Links, no-STM-n Links, Ethernet, WDM), trails SDH, trails WDM, VCGRoups, Ethernet
services are present on, a confirmation window is displayed.

Figure 2.19 : Window Rename NE M1400 name (1)

Confirm the modification ("Yes") : the results window is displayed.

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
Page 93/236

TOPOLOGY MANAGEMENT

Figure 2.20 : Window Rename NE M1400 name (2)


 Double-to click on the line of result (or click on [Details]) to obtain the results, in particular the list of
cross-connections and bridging points renamed in each NE, following the renaming of the trails,
bearers, Ethernet services present in IONOS-NMS.

Figure 2.21 : Window Rename NE M1400 name (3)

Figure 2.22 : Window Rename NE M1400 name (4)

Figure 2.23 : Window Rename NE M1400 name (5)

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


Page 94/236
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited

TOPOLOGY MANAGEMENT

Figure 2.24 : Window Rename NE M1400 name (6)

Figure 2.25 : Window Rename NE M1400 name (7)

 Close all the windows (with [Close]), then close the Properties window (with [Cancel])

Notes :

On modification of the M1400 name of a NE :


the name of the links which finish on it (STM-n Links, Ethernet Links, WDM
Links and no-STM-n Links) is modified
- the name of the bearers, trails and VCGroups which finish on it is modified.
For the bearers and the trails activated or partially activated, the name of
cross-connections is modified in equipment.
- the name of Ethernet services which finish on it is modified. For the
Ethernet services activated or partially activated, the name of bridging
points is modified in equipment.
- The name of Trails WDM which finish on it is modified.

In the window Topology View, the M1400 name is displayed if you move the
pointer of mouse on the NE icon.
If the type of NE is EXT155HA, the modifications are done in the two
physical NEs.

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
Page 95/236

TOPOLOGY MANAGEMENT

2.4.8 - To audit a network element (NE)


Caution : This operation is not valid for virtual network elements (VNE), FOT155A,
FOT155C and multiplexers ADR155C P2 and FMX, Sagem-Link, Sagem-Link
Light, Sagem-Link 2, SLF-v1 , SLA equipment, DSLAM equipment, SHDSL
equipment, Sagem DTX equipment, IP equipment . it is valid for SLF-N, SLF-H,
and for a FMX with card GIES, tab General.

This task is used to check the differences in general parameters, cards, "cross-connections", MSP
protection MS-Spring protection and monitoring between the database of the NE and that of the IONOSNMS manager.
 In the explorer or in the Topology View (Figure 2.1), click left on the network element to be checked.
 In the pop-up menu, select Audit : the Audit Results window is displayed.
Notes :

If there is an inconsistency between the manager data and the NE data, the
audit line is displayed red: a message at the top left of the window will then
indicate that the NE is not aligned.
At the end of the audit, an ( !) is displayed on the NE icon.
If the type of NE is EXT155HA, the audit must be launched on one of two
physical NEs (Working or Protection). Launch before the menu Show
physical NEs.

 a/ Select the General tab to display the general parameters




the name of NE

the indication (#Yes or No) of inscription of the IP address of IONOS-NMS server in the table
of the receivers of traps of NE + case "log traps enable" ticked (by HTTP, menu
Equipment/Management)

the indication of inscription in Supervisor mode of IP address IP of server IONOS-NMS in the


table of the Managers of NE (always Supervisor in NMS, Supervisor in NE if the table of the
managers is empty, or if the IP address of IONOS-NMS Server is registered in Supervisor)
(by HTPP, menu Equipment/Management).

The parameters of performance collect (ADR155C P4.1 and ADR25000 EXTRA P2.1
only, ADR622):
- Start 24h count time (hour top 24h)
- Tolerance Date : tolerance of time set on performances (in secondes)rance de
remise l'heure sur les performances (en seconds)
- Nea correlation Enable (mode Near correlation activ ou non in equipment)
- Performance Threshold Trap Enable (send of threshold trap or not)
The values of these parameters can be modified in the flle "server.xml" in folder Config of
application (see 1.2.3.10 -).

The parameters associated with ethernet service (ADR25000 EXTRA P2.2 only with GFP
card):
- MSTP configuration
- Traffic Class Configuration

the indication of VC12 cross-connecting switch.

the possibility to manage NUT channels (ADR2500C or ADR2500 EXTRA only)

the maximum of LO monitored points (the maximum is 28 for equipment of type ADR2500C
or ADR2500 EXTRA with a VC12 cross-connecting switch).

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


Page 96/236
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited

TOPOLOGY MANAGEMENT


the maximum of LO monitored points (the maximum is 1008 for equipment of type ADR622 with a
VC12 cross-connecting switch).

The possibility to manage the mode SNC/N (ADR155 P4.1 only, ADR2500 EXTRA P2.2
and ADR622)

The possibility to manage the bridging points (ADR155C P4.1 rev AF or ADR25000
EXTRA P2.1 only with card GFP, ADR622 with card GFP).

The possibility to manage MSTP for Ethernet services (ADR2500 EXTRA P2.2, only with
GFP card, ADR622 with card GFP)

The possibility to manage the sharing EVP-Line/LAN Support for Ethernet services
(ADR2500 EXTRA P2.2 only with GFP card, ADR622 with card GFP)

The possibility to manage the probes of continuity-check OAM-CC Support for Ethernet
services (ADR2500 EXTRA P2.2 only with GFP card, ADR622 with card GFP)

The possibility to manage the Tandem Connection sur les trails VC4 et VC3 (ADR2500
EXTRA P2.2 only, ADR622 with card GFP).




The possibility to configure RS Path Trace for SDH links


Standby support : this function is available with version ADR155C P5.5, ADR2500 EXTRA
version P3.0.5 and not supported on ADR622

Note :

For a FSP2000, the tab "General" is empty.

b/ Select the Inventory tab, then:





the Cards tab to display the cards of an NE: shelf no., shelf name, type of card family and
card type.
the MSPs tab to display the MSP protections.

c/ Select the Cross-Connections tab to display the cross-connections activated (not


available for FSP2000 and FSP3000).
d/ Select the Bridging points tab to display the "switch" activated on GFP cards and used for
Ethernet services.
e/ Select the VCGroup tab to display the VC of activated VCGroups in which trails are
allocated.
f/ Select the Monitoring tab to display all the points checked relative to the STMn link created, to
the activated Ethernet links, to the activated WDM links, to the activated cross-connections, to the
activated Ethernet services, to the activated WDM trails and to activated ring (ADR2500C or
ADR2500 EXTRA only).
g/ Select the MS-SPRing tab to display the MS-SPRing protection parameters: the window
displays all the protection rings (ADR2500C or ADR2500 EXTRA only).
h/ Select the ETH/VCG ports tab to display the Ethernet/VCG ports parameters, relative to the
activated Ethernet links and VCGRoups (ADR2500 EXTRA P2.2 only, ADR622).
i/ Select the MEPIDs tab to display the identifications of GFP cards used by continuity-check
probes (sink) of activated ethernet service (ADR2500 EXTRA P2.2 only, ADR622).
j/ Select the Continuity-check probes to display the continuity-check probes (source and sink)
of activated ethernet services(ADR2500 EXTRA P2.2 only, ADR622).
k/ Select the SDH Ports to display the configuration of the ports involved in activated RS Path
Trace
IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
Page 97/236

TOPOLOGY MANAGEMENT

Figure 2.26 : Window Audit Results / General

Figure 2.27 : Window Audit Results / Inventory / Cards


IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05
Page 98/236
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited

TOPOLOGY MANAGEMENT

Figure 2.28 : Window Audit Results / Inventory / MSPs

Figure 2.29 : Window Audit Results / Cross-connections


IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
Page 99/236

TOPOLOGY MANAGEMENT

Figure 2.30 : Window Audit Results / Bridging points

Figure 2.31 : Window Audit Results / VCGroups

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


Page 100/236
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited

TOPOLOGY MANAGEMENT

Figure 2.32 : Window Audit Results / Monitoring

Figure 2.33 : Window Audit Results / ETH/VCG ports

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
Page 101/236

TOPOLOGY MANAGEMENT

Figure 2.34 : Window Audit Results / MEPIDs

Figure 2.35 : Window Audit Results / Continuity-check probes

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


Page 102/236
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited

TOPOLOGY MANAGEMENT

Figure 2.36 : Window Audit Results / SDH Ports

Figure 2.37 : Window Audit Results / MS-SPRING

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
Page 103/236

TOPOLOGY MANAGEMENT
 In the Audit Results / MS-SPRING window, you can display the details of a protection ring by clicking
[Detail] : the window displayed has 4 tabs :


The General tab lists the general parameters of the MS-SPRing protection,

The Topology tab lists the topology table for the equipment,

The NUT tab lists the table of channels structure.

The Misconnection tab lists the table used to generate the SIA signal in the failed trails in
the event of a multiple failure.

Figure 2.38 : Window Audit Results / MS-SPRing / Detail


 Click [Close] to close the current window.
Note :

(1) For a FMX-GIES, the Inventory tab is present if the variable


"isFmxInventoryLikeVne" is set to false in the server-advanced file. (see
1.2.3.37 -To configure the FMX backup configuration file)
(2) For a FMX-GIES, the Inventory tab is updated when a NE database is
successfully done. See Figure 2.39 : Window Audit Results / FMX inventory

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


Page 104/236
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited

TOPOLOGY MANAGEMENT

Figure 2.39 : Window Audit Results / FMX inventory

2.4.9 - To reapplicate the general parameters in a network element (NMS to NE)

Caution :

This operation is not valid for virtual network elements (VNE), FOT155A,
FOT155C and multiplexers ADR155C P2 and FMX, Sagem-Link, Sagem-Link
Light, Sagem-Link 2, SLF-v1 , SLA equipment, DSLAM equipment, SHDSL
equipment, Sagem DTX equipment, IP equipment. This operation is valid for
SLF-N, SLF-H, SLF-A, or FMX with ard GIES, tab General.

This task allows to reapplicate the general parameters (name of NE, inscription of IP address of
IONOS-NMS server in the table of receivers of traps of and updated of variable "Log Traps Enable") in
the NE.
 In the explorer or in the Topology View (Figure 2.1), click left on the network element to be checked.
 In the pop-up menu, select Audit : the Audit Results window is displayed.

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
Page 105/236

TOPOLOGY MANAGEMENT

Figure 2.40 : Window Audit / General Reapplication


 Select the General tab to reapplicate the general parameters.
Notes :

If there is an inconsistency between the manager data and the NE data, the
audit line is displayed red: a message at the top left of the window will then
indicate that the general parameters are not aligned.

 Click [NMS to NE general parameters reapplication] to launch the reapplication of general


parameters in the NE : the results window is displayed.

Figure 2.41 : Window General Parameters Reapplication Results

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


Page 106/236
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited

TOPOLOGY MANAGEMENT
 Double-to click on the line of result to obtain the details of reapplication for general parameters.

Figure 2.42 : Window General Parameters Reapplication Results/Details


 Click [Close] and [Finish] : the General tab is updated after the reapplication.
Notes :

The table of the Managers is not updated automatically. It must be updated


manually by using HTTP browser.
The long name can not be updated in the equipment according to the used
configuration (see 1.2.3.7 -).
For a NE of type EXT155HA, the parameters are updated in the physical NE
on which the menu Audit has been launched (Working or Protection).

2.4.10 - To align the capacity parameters from a network element (NE to NMS)
Caution : This operation is not valid for virtual network elements (VNE), FOT155A,
FOT155C and multiplexers ADR155C P2 and FMX, Sagem-Link, Sagem-Link
Light, Sagem-Link 2, SLF-v1 , SLA, SLF-N, SLF-H, SLF-A, equipment, DSLAM
equipment, SHDSL equipment, Sagem DTX equipment, WDM FSP2000
equipment, IP equipment .

This task allows to align the capacity parameters (indication of a VC12 cross-connecting switch,
management of NUT channels, maximum number of LO monitored points, management of SNC/N
mode, management of bridging points for Ethernet services, MSTP support, EVP-Line/LAN support,
OAM-CC support, Tandem Connection support) in IONOS-NMS.
 In the explorer or in the Topology View (Figure 2.1), click left on the network element to be checked.
 In the pop-up menu, select Audit : the Audit Results window is displayed.

Figure 2.43 : Window Audit / Capacity parameters Alignment


IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
Page 107/236

TOPOLOGY MANAGEMENT
 Select the General tab to align the capacity parameters.
Notes :

If there is an inconsistency between the manager data and the NE data, the
audit line is displayed red: a message at the top left of the window will then
indicate that the capacity parameters are not aligned.

 Click [NE to NMS capabitlity parameters alignment] to launch the alignment of the capacity
parameters in IONOS database : the results window is displayed.

Figure 2.44 : Window General capability parameters alignment Results


 Double-click on the result line to obtain the details of capability parameters alignment.
 Click [Close] and [Finish] : the General tab is updated after the alignment.

2.4.11 - To perform an inventory alignment for a network element (NE)


Caution : This operation is not valid for virtual network elements (VNE), FOT155A,
FOT155C and multiplexers ADR155C P2 and FMX, Sagem-Link, Sagem-Link
Light, Sagem-Link 2, SLF-v1 , SLA, SLF-N, SLF-H, SLF-A, equipment, DSLAM
equipment, SHDSL equipment, Sagem DTX equipment, IP equipment .

This task is used to align the inventory of an NE (cards and MSP protections) in the manager with the
actual database of the NE.

 In the explorer or in the Topology View (Figure 2.1), click left on the network element to be checked.
 In the pop-up menu, select Audit : the configuration Audit Results window is displayed.

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


Page 108/236
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited

TOPOLOGY MANAGEMENT

Figure 2.45 : Window Audit / Inventory Alignment


 Select the Inventory tab.
 Select the Cards sub-tab to align the cards.
Note :

If there is an inconsistency between the manager data and that of the NE in


the inventory, the audit line is displayed red: a message at the top left of the
window in the inventory tab will indicate that the cards are not aligned.
For a NE of type EXT155HA, the alignment command must be launched on
the physical NE. Activate before the menu Show Physical NEs to launch the
Audit.

 Ciick [NE to NMS Inventory alignment] to launch an NE inventory alignment to the manager: the
result window is displayed with the list of basic actions (Insert Card, Delete Card, Update Card).

Figure 2.46 : Window Inventory Alignment Results


 Click [Close] and [Finish]: the Inventory tab is updated after the alignment.

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
Page 109/236

TOPOLOGY MANAGEMENT

Notes :

A card can only be deleted provided its interfaces are free (no Link, no
VCGroup, no trail, no service Ethernet ).
A card can always be replaced by a card of an equivalent family (For ADR2500
: 4STM1_ELEC and 4STM1_OPT, for ADR155C : ADRSTM1_OPT and
ADRSTM1-ELEC).
A card can be replaced by a card of a different family provided its interfaces
are free (no Link, no VCGroup, no trail, no service Ethernet).
Following the audit, when the NE is aligned, the exclamation point ( !) or the
question mark ( ?) disappears from the NE icon.

2.4.12 - To display and modify the configuration of an equipment


Caution : This operation is not valid for the VNEs.

 In the explorer or in the Topology View (Figure 2.1), click left to select the network element to be
displayed: you can obtain the equipment configuration directly by double-clicking.
 In the pop-up menu, select Equipment View : the graphic application is started up and displays the
equipment configuration.
Notes :

For the ADR155C, ADR63E1, ADR155CPE, ADR2500C, ADR2500 EXTRA or


ADR622, ADR10000HN, EXT155HA equipment, the Equipment View function is
validated, the HTTP browser is initiated via the HTTP PROXY installed on the
IONOS-NMS Server which activates the HTTP server integrated in the
equipment in accordance with the user profile (see 1.2.4.2 - et 1.2.4.3 -). For
an EXT155HA, ADR155C P2.6, ADR155E and ADR10000HN, the HTTP PROXY
cannot be used.
For ADR155E, the FMX equipment, Sagem-Link 2, SLF-v1, SLA, SLF-N, SLF-H,
equipment and FSP2000, FSP3000 equipment, when the Equipment View
function is validated, the LCT Application is launched (installed beforehand).
For ADR10000, when the Equipment View function is validated, the ADR10000
proxy is launched.

For the FOT155C equipment, when the Equipment View function is validated,
a customer application is initiated and uses the SNMP protocol and the
associated MIB to communicate with the equipment in accordance with the
user profile.

For the Sagem-Link and Sagem-Link Light Equipment, when the Equipment
View function is validated, a customer application is initiated and uses the
SNMP protocol and the associated MIB to communicate with the equipment in
accordance with the user profile.

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


Page 110/236
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited

TOPOLOGY MANAGEMENT

Figure 2.47 : Window SAGEM-LINK Equipment View

Figure 2.48 : Window SAGEM-LINK LIGHT Equipment View

For the SLF-A the Mozilla Firefox browser must be installed on the PC client.

Figure 2.49 : Window SLF-A Equipment View


Notes: For a FMX-GIES, if the the variable "isFmxInventoryLikeVne" is set to true in the server-advanced file
(see 1.2.3.37 -SYSTEM INSTALLATION AND MANAGEMENT), it is possible to add container(s) and
interface(s), otherwise the FMX inventory is automatically discovery.
IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
Page 111/236

TOPOLOGY MANAGEMENT


Click [Add container] to add a container.

Click [Add Interface] to add an interface to the network elements.

Click [Add Interface] to add an interface of type "OTHER" on any card.

 Click [Apply] to validate the modifications.


Note :

(1) For a FMX-GIES, the Inventory tab is updated if the variable


"isFmxInventoryLikeVne" is set to false in the server-advanced file. (see
1.2.3.37 -SYSTEM INSTALLATION AND MANAGEMENT) and when a NE
database is successfully done. See Figure 2.50

Figure 2.50 : Window Network Element properties / FMX Inventory

2.4.13 - To display and modify the SNMP parameters


This procedure is only valid for ADR equipment (ADR155C, ADR155CPE, ADR63E1, EXT155HA,
ADR2500C, ADR2500 EXTRA or ADR622) in accordance with the user profile (administrator, operator
or observer).
 In the explorer or in the Topology View, click left to select the network element for which you want to
display the SNMP parameters.
 In the pop-up menu, select SNMP View (see the tables in Appendix "SNMP view table").


Select MIB II to display and modify the tables of MIB II : System Info, IP Info, IP Addresses,
Interfaces, Routing Tables.

Select Equipment (1) to display the tables of the equipment MIB: Security, Traps, Up and
Download, Manager Table.

Select Session to display and modify the session tables.

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


Page 112/236
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited

TOPOLOGY MANAGEMENT

Figure 2.51 : Example of SNMP View Window


 Click [Refresh] to refresh the table (2).
 Modify the values as desired (3).
 Click [Apply] to validate the new configuration.
Notes :

(1) To modify the equipment parameters, you must have an administrator


profile.
(2) Use the [Stop] button to stop the table refresh procedure.
(3) Only the parameters displayed in blue can be modified: double-click on
these parameters to modify them.

2.4.14 - To Back up the database of a network element


This procedure is used to back up the database of a NE of type ADR155C P2, ADR155C, ADR63E1,
ADR155CPE, ADR155E, ADR10000HN, ADR10000, EXT155HA, ADR2500C, ADR2500 EXTRA,
ADR622, FSP3000 and FOTC.
 In the explorer or in the Topology View (Figure 2.1), click left to select the network element for which
you want to back up the database.
 In the pop-up menu, select NE database backup : a message of confirmation is displayed.
 Confirm the operation to launch the backup of the data (1) : the result window is displayed.

Figure 2.52 : Window Network Element Backup Results


IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
Page 113/236

TOPOLOGY MANAGEMENT
 Click [Finish] to close the window, when it is finished.
Notes :

(1) The TFTP server must be launched as a preliminary on the machine used
like IONOS-NMS server.
(2)The backup is done in the repertory, specified in the file
"Equipementbackup.xml" contained in the folder Config of the repertory
chosen for the installation (by default c:\Program Files\IonosNMS\Backup\Eqpt under Windows and /data/IONOS-NMS/Backup/Eqpt under
Solaris).
The file is stored under the repertory yyyy/yyyy-mm/yyyy-mm-dd.
The name of the file is form:
NEdatabase-M1400 name-addresses IP-YYYY-MM-DD.
(3) For the ADR155C, ADR155CPE, EXT155HA and ADR63E1 two files are
generated (db and net).
For the EXT155HA, the command must be launched on each physical NE
(Working and Protection).
For the ADR2500C and ADR2500 eXtra, ADR622, ADR155E and ADR10000HN,
only one file is generated (db).
For the FSP3000, only one file is generated (dbs).
For a FMX-GIES, there are two generated files (.tpi and .lst)
(4) If the backup is not finished correctly with a status "Unknown error",
modify the value of SNMP time-out in the Preferences of NE ("SNMP requests
configuration for all NEs " in menu Tools/Preferences/NE). Put by example
60s instead of 30s. and do again the backup.

ADR10000: (1) The FTP server must be launched as a preliminary on the machine used
like IONOS-NMS server.
(2) The backup is done in the repertory, specified in the file
"Equipementbackup.xml" contained in the folder Config of the repertory
chosen for the installation (by default c:\Program Files\IonosNMS\Backup\Eqpt under Windows and /data/IONOS-NMS/Backup/Eqpt under
Solaris).
The files are stored under the repertory yyyy/yyyy-mm/dd.
There are two files and the name of the files is form:
NEDatabase-M1400 name- IP address-YYYY-MM-DD-nnnn.db and .install
nnnn is the index of the file.
(3) In case of Backup 1+1 secure see 9.2.13 - Backup 1+1 of IONOS NMS
servers (Option) , the NE database is also transferred to the remote IonosNMS server.
FMX-GIES: (1) For a FMX-GIES, in case of backup failed, the result window is displayed
with a failed result after the time-out configured in server-advanced.xml file
("FMXBackupTimeout" variable). See Figure 2.53.

Figure 2.53 : Window Network Element Backup failed result


IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05
Page 114/236
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited

TOPOLOGY MANAGEMENT
Also, a critical alarm is displayed in the Fault View with a Backup FMX
missing event type. See Figure 2.54.
This alarm automatically disappears when the FMX backup is done
successfully.

Figure 2.54 : Window Critical FMX backup missing alarm in Fault View
FMX-GIES): (2) For a FMX-GIES, when a modification of configuration (provisioning,
cross-connections ) is done, a warning alarm is displayed in the Fault View
with a Configuration Changed event type. It appears at the next FMX
database backup. See Figure 2.55.

Figure 2.55 : Window Warning Configuration Changed alarm in Fault View

2.4.15 - To restore the database of a network element


This procedure is used to restore the database of a NE of type ADR155C P2, ADR155C, ADR63E1,
ADR155CPE, EXT155HA, ADR155E, ADR2500C, ADR2500EXTRA, ADR622, ADR10000HN,
FSP3000 and FOTC.
 In the explorer or in the Topology View (Figure 2.1), click left to select the network element for which
you want to restore the database.
 In the pop-up menu, select NE database restore : a message of confirmation is displayed.
 Confirm the operation : the list of the files available is displayed.

Figure 2.56 : Window Network Element Restoration


 Select one of lines (1) and click [Restore] to launch the restoration of data (2): the result window is
displayed.

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
Page 115/236

TOPOLOGY MANAGEMENT

Figure 2.57 : Window Network Element Restoration Results


 Click [Finish] to close the window when it is finished.
 Launch an audit of the equipment to align parameters if necessary.
Notes :

(1) In the name of the file, the "/" of M1400 name is replaced by a "(".
(2) The TFTP server must be launched as a preliminary on the machine used
like IONOS-NMS server.
(3) For the EXT155HA, the command must be launched on each physical NE
(Working and Protection).
(4) If the restoration is not finished correctly with a status "Unknown error",
modify the value of SNMP time-out in the Preferences of NE ("SNMP requests
configuration for all NEs " in menu Tools/Preferences/NE). Put by example
60s instead of 30s. and do again the restoration.

2.4.16 - To restore the database of ADR10000


You have to use the ADR10000 Proxy (EMS-ADR) to restore the NE database.
Refer to the main document Element Management System for ADR Platforms version 7 N 253 216 157A or EMS-ADR User Manual version 8.1 N 253 359 465-A Upgrading NE software To update a
software of a selected NE, Load DB to NE option.

Note : (1) Use Load DB to NE option to restore the last NE backuped database.
Note : (2) To restore another NE backuped database, you have to copy first the two files (
.db and .install) from the IONOS-NMS server to the EMS-ADR server with its IP
address instead of its name.
Example of procedure (using the scp command):
From the IONOS-NMS server into the backup directory, enter the command:
scp File_source Login_destination@Ip_destination:/Rep_destination/File
e.g.:
#scp NEDatabase-ADR10K-2009-09-16-0001.install
ems@10.0.0.1:/sdh_home/ems/DownLoad/DB05.8120/50.0.0.1.install
ADR10K-2009-09-16-0001.install is the NE database file stored into the
/data/IONOS-NMS/backup/eqpt/yyyy/yyyy-mm/dd folder of the main server
or into the /tools/IONOS-NMS/securelog/<Ip address of the main
server>/backup/eqpt/yyyy/yyyy-mm/dd folder of the Backup server
ems is the login (EMS-ADR), you must enter the password later.
10.0.01 is the IP address of the EMS-ADR
IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05
Page 116/236
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited

TOPOLOGY MANAGEMENT
/sdh_home/ems/DownLoad/DB05.8120/ is the path to copy the file
50.0.0.1.install is the name of the destination file using the IP address of the
NE instead of its name
You have to apply the same procedure to copy the .db file.
Caution with EMS-ADR R7.2 : The label of cross-connection are not recovered following
a NE database restoration from the EMS-ADR in R7.2 version.
To restore cross-connection labels, launch an audit, select the
Crossconnections tab and click on the Global NMS to NE crossconnections
re-activation button to launch the reactivation of all cross-connections in the
NE.
To restore cross-connection labels from the EMS-ADR R7.2, select a NE and
open the Shelf View, and on the menu bar select System  Import XC. The XC
labels of all NE will be restored.

2.4.17 - To update the software on a network element


This procedure is used to manage the software installed on the network. It provides the administrator
with the version installed on the NE and allows the administrator to update the version.
 In the menus bar of the Topology View (Figure 2.1), click Tools > Software Management : the
Software Management window is displayed.

Figure 2.58 : Window Software Management window


 Select the mode in which you want to work by ticking the corresponding button:
a/ Inventory to read the inventory
b/ Update to download a new software in the reserve location.
c/ Switch to switch the reserve software to the current software.
Note : The "Update" is the most complete mode.
IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
Page 117/236

TOPOLOGY MANAGEMENT
a/ Inventory mode

 Click [Browse] to select, in the tree, the sub-network or NE on which you want to work.
 Tick the equipment type selected : ADR155C, ADR2500C, ADR63E1, EXT155HA, ADR2500 EXTRA,
ADR622, FSP2000, FSP3000, ADR155CPE, ADR155E, XP3000, 3@Pack 4400, 3@Pack 4048,
3@Pack 4450, 3P@C 4900, SLF-H.
 Give the soft type:


For an ADR155C equipment, Mother Board, ADRIMA Board, ADRLAN Board, or ADRGFP
Board

For an ADR2500C equipment, CTRL Board, GIG-E Board, FPGA, HTTP Custom, Default
Config

For an ADR63E1 equipment, Mother Board only

For an ADR155CPE, Mother Board

For an EXT155HA, Mother Board only

For an ADR2500 EXTRA, Shelf Pack, Gig-E Pack, or GFP150-eXtra

For an ADR622 equipment, SHELF Pack ACTIVE, SHELF Pack STANDBY, GFP150-622
ACTIVE, GFP150-622 STANDBY, GFP2500-2GE ACTIVE, GFP2500-2GE STANDBY

For a FSP2000, NEMI only

For a FSP3000, NEMI only

For an ADR155E, Program pack only

For 3@Pack 4400, XDU and OS

For 3@Pack 4048, GTIOOCT and OS

For 3@Pack 4450, XDU and OS

For 3@Pack 4900, XDU and OS

For SLF-H , Program pack, ODU1 and ODU2

The switch type is given automatically; according to the soft type.

 Click [Show list] : the inventory of the various current and reserve software versions is
automatically displayed for the equipment selected.
 Click [End session] when you have finished.

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


Page 118/236
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited

TOPOLOGY MANAGEMENT

Figure 2.59 : Window Software Management window / Inventory


Notes :

For an EXT155HA, the inventory is displayed for the two Physical NEs
(Working and Protection).

b/ Update mode

 Click [Browse] to select, in the tree, the sub-network or NE on which you want to work.
 Tick the equipment type selected : ADR155C, ADR2500C, ADR63E1, EXT155HA, ADR2500 EXTRA,
ADR622, FSP2000, FSP3000, ADR155CPE, ADR155E, 3@Pack 4400, 3@Pack 4048, 3@Pack
4450, 3@Pack 4900, SLF-H
 Give the soft type:


For an ADR155C equipment, Mother Board, ADRIMA Board, ADRLAN Board, or ADRGFP
Board

For an ADR2500C equipment, CTRL Board, GIG-E Board, FPGA, HTTP Custom, Default
Config

For an ADR63E1 equipment, Mother Board only

For an ADR155CPE, Mother Board

For an EXT155HA, Mother Board only

For an ADR2500 EXTRA, Shelf Pack, Gig-E Pack, or GFP150-eXtra

For an ADR622 equipment, SHELF Pack ACTIVE, SHELF Pack STANDBY, GFP150-622
ACTIVE, GFP150-622 STANDBY, GFP2500-2GE ACTIVE, GFP2500-2GE STANDBY

For a FSP2000, NEMI only

For a FSP3000, NEMI only

For an ADR155E, Program only

For 3@Pack 4400, XDU and OS

For 3@Pack 4048, GTIOOCT and OS

For 3@Pack 4450, XDU and OS

For 3@Pack 4900, XDU and OS

For SLF-H , Program pack, ODU1 and ODU2

The switch type is given automatically; according to the soft type.


IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
Page 119/236

TOPOLOGY MANAGEMENT
 Click [Browse] on the line of selected equipment to select the software to be downloaded.
 Click [Show list] : the inventory of the various current and reserve software versions is
automatically displayed for the equipment selected.
 Click [Download] to run the downloading operation: the results are displayed in the Result area.
Notes :

The downloading will take place if the version to be downloaded is already


present in the current or reserve list (Button [Reserve download]).
The TFTP server must be launched as a preliminary on the machine used like
IONOS-NMS server.
For an EXT155HA, the download is done for the two physical NEs (Working
and Protection). The result is given for each physical NE.

 Click [Refresh inventory] to read and update the display of the version numbers of the softwares
installed on the NEs.
 Click [End session] if you have finished.

c/ Switch Mode

 Click [Browse] to select, in the tree, the sub-network or NE on which you want to work.
 Tick the equipment type selected : ADR155C, ADR2500C, ADR63E1, ADR155CPE, EXT155HA,
ADR2500 EXTRA, ADR622, FSP2000, FSP3000, SLF-H
 Give the soft type:


For an ADR155C equipment, Mother Board, ADRIMA Board, ADRLAN Board, or ADRGFP
Board

For an ADR2500C equipment, CTRL Board, GIG-E Board, FPGA,

For an ADR63E1 equipment, Mother Board only

For an ADR155CPE, Mother Board

For an EXT155HA, Mother Board only

For an ADR2500 EXTRA, Shelf Pack, Gig-E Pack, or GFP150-eXtra

For an ADR622 equipment, SHELF Pack ACTIVE, SHELF Pack STANDBY, GFP150-622
ACTIVE, GFP150-622 STANDBY, GFP2500-2GE ACTIVE, GFP2500-2GE STANDBY

For a FSP2000, NEMI only

For a FSP3000, NEMI only

For SLF-H , ODU1 and ODU2

The switch type is given automatically; according to the soft type.

 Click [Show list] : the inventory of the various current and reserve software versions is
automatically displayed for the equipment selected.
 Click [Switch] to run the software switchover operation.
Notes :

The switchover operation will not take place if the current version is
identical to the reserve version.
For an EXT155HA, the switch is done for the two physical NEs (Working and
Protection). The result is given for each physical NE.

 Click [End session] when you have finished.


IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05
Page 120/236
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited

TOPOLOGY MANAGEMENT
Configuration file : software.xml

The configuration file is located in the Config folder of the directory selected for installation (by default,
Ionos-NMS).
This is used to set:
 tftp root : directory used by tftp.
 softrepository : directory used for default selection in Software management.
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
<software>
<!--==================================-->
<!-- If software.xml is on the server -->
<!--==================================-->
<!-- locate the tftp root directory -->
<tftp root="../tftproot"/>
<!--==================================-->
<!-- If software.xml is on a client -->
<!--==================================-->
<!-- download parameters -->
<download softrepository="\"/>
</software>

This file is updated automatically when the server is installed under Windows.(see 1.2.3.2 -)

2.4.18 - To Export the configuration of a network element


This procedure is used to export the configuration of a NE or several NEs in a file xml.
 Display the NML View by clicking View > NML View.
 In the search window, select NEs : the list of NEs is displayed.
 Select the NE(s) then click right to bring up the pop-up menu.
 Click [Exportxml] : a file xml is created on the Server in the folder (according to the configuration of
file "file.xml" in folder Config) :
/IONOS-NMS_install_dir/log/xml//aaaa/aaaa-mm/jj is the folder by default with Windows.
/data/IONOS-NMS_install_dir/log/xml//aaaa/aaaa-mm/jj is the folder by default with Solaris.
The name of file is ne-yyyy-mm-dd-000n.xml
 To obtain a file of format "text", select the bin folder and run the command :
NEsToExcel.cmd filename1 filename2 with filename1 : output file and filename2 : file.xml
Notes : This file give for each NE :

M1400 name

Name

Type

IP Address

Secondary IP address

Indication of proxy and n

Additional information

Hard inventory (rack, shelf, cards and ports)

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
Page 121/236

TOPOLOGY MANAGEMENT

2.4.19 - To visualize the counters of performance for SLF-v1, Sagem-Link, SLFN and SLF-H equipment
This procedure is used to collect and visualize the counters of performance of equipment of type
SLF-v1, Sagem-Link, SLF-N or SLF-H. This is performed by means external tool NMSperftool, installed
on the machine used by the server.
A scheduled task allows to collect the performance data of equipment once by day at 12h 00. The
collect is done for all equipment of type SLF-v1, Sagem-Link, SLF-N and SLF-H created in IONOS
NMS database.

2.4.19.1 - To Visualize the graphs of performance collect

 Display the Topology View (Figure 2.1) by clicking View > Topology View.
 Select a NE of type SLF-v1, SLF-N, SLF-H, or Sagem-Link then click right to bring up the pop-up
menu.
 Click [Perf view] : the graphs of performance data for this equipment are displayed.

Figure 2.60 : Window Perf View on SLF-v1


 The collected counters are :


UAS (Unavailable Seconds) counter 24h in mode G821

SES (Severely Errored Seconds) counter 24h in mode G821

ES (Errored Seconds) counter 24h in mode G821

BBE (Background Block Errors) counter 24h in mode G826. except for SLF-H

UAP (Unavailable Periods) counter 24h in mode G821.

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


Page 122/236
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited

TOPOLOGY MANAGEMENT


And for SLF-N : RSL (Radio Signalling Link) counter : RSL DAY HIGH1, RSL DAY HIGH2,
RSL LOW1, RSL LOW2, RSL DAY LOW HIGH, RSL DAY MAX1, RSL DAY MAX2, RSL DAY
MIN1, RSL DAY MIN2 and RLS DAY MIN MAX

Figure 2.61 : Window Perf View / NMSperftool on SLF-v1


Notes:

The displayed priod can be modified with button [Presets].


Button [Tree View] allows to display the list of all SLF-v1 created in IONOSNMS and to activate the visualization of different graphs for each equipment.
The collect of performance data is automatically activated for each SagemLink, SLF-v1, SLF-N and SLF-H created in IONOS-NMS.
The collected data are displayed 24h after the collect.

Also, for SLF-N, the collected counters include the Ethernet performances:

Receive Total Packets Port 1 and 2

Receive Unicast Packets Port 1 and 2

Receive Multicast Packets Port 1 and 22

Receive Broadcast Packets Port 1 and 2

Receive Packets With Errors Port 1 and 2

Receive Pause Frames Port 1 and 2

Transmit Total Bytes Port 1 and 2

Transmit Total Packets Port 1 and 2

Transmit Unicast Packets Port 1 and 2

Transmit Multicast Packets Port 1 and 2

Transmit Broadcast Packets Port 1 and 2

Transmit Pause Frames Port 1 and 2

CRC Align Errors Port 1 and 2

Drop Events Port 1 and 2

Undersize Packets Port 1 and 2

Oversize Packets Port 1 and 2


IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
Page 123/236

TOPOLOGY MANAGEMENT


Internal Mac Receive Errors Port 1 and 2

Common counters to Port 1 and Port 2:




PerformancePERInfoMantisse

PerformancePERInfoExposant

Figure 2.62 : Window Perf View / NMSPerftool on SLF-H (Ethernet counters)

2.4.19.2 - To export the collects of performance

An executable file is supplied to launch an exportation of collects on 365 days and generate a CSV file.
This CSV file can be processed with external application.
The export of performance collect for SLF-v1, Sagem-Link, SLF-N or SLF-H equipment is launched on
the Server IONOS-NMS.
 In the directory chosen for installation (Ionos-NMS or /tools/IONOS-NMS by default), select the bin
folder.
 Run the command : exportSLFperfs <file name>

2.4.20 - EMS API Integration


The EMS API Edition 1 enables a partner to integrate its own equipment at EMS level into Ionos-NMS
for equipment with SNMP traps.This API offers 2 features :
- double-clic on a NE, that opens the TPI / Equipment view on the Ionos-NMS client PC, to allow the
user to access avanced menus of management, provided by the external windows application provided
by the equipment vendor
IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05
Page 124/236
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited

TOPOLOGY MANAGEMENT
- alarms and events management on these equipment :


to read the current alamrs list

to receive informations (alarms appearance, alarms disappearance,events)

to detect the traps losses

One type of equipment is defined by :




A code name in IONOS-NMS

An icon which will be displayed on the map

A name will be displayed on the map

The API is provided at SNMP level, by modifiying the files .bsh given in example
Following files are needed to integrate the equipment in Ionos-NMS :

Ionos-NMS\config\topo\types.xml

Contains the list of all NE-Types managed by ionos. EmsApi NE-Type must use the "EmsApiNe"
category, like following example :

Note : that the name is an unique ID that will be used to identify this NE-Type in Ionos. This ID must be
returned by SnmpEmsApi.getManagedNETypes () method. The size of this ID must not exceed 20
cars.

Ionos-NMS\config\EmsApi\EMSAPIAdr.bsh

This file contains the implementation of SnmpEmsApi.java methods. There is not constraints on its
name.
The file supplied as example must be modified according to the MIB SNMP provided by the equipment.

Ionos-NMS\netype\ADR2500EXTRA_EMSAPI_EXAMPLE.xml

This file is needed by the Ionos-NMS framework. You must copy the template defined in
ADR2500EXTRA_EMSAPI_EXAMPLE.xml and modify only the name of the NE-Type :

Note : The name must be the same as the ID of the NE-Type defined in types.xml (case
sensitive)

Ionos-NMS\netpilot\webapps\root\resources\topo\default\
IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
Page 125/236

TOPOLOGY MANAGEMENT
ADR2500EXTRA_EMSAPI_EXAMPLE.gif
The .gif that represents the NE must be stored in that directory.
NOTE: The name of the file must be the same as the ID of the NeType defined in types.xml (case
sensitive).

Ionos-NMS\lib\beans\lb-sclientcustom.jar

Open this .jar file and modify \properties\custom_resources_en.properties to add the label of the NEType you want to add :

This is the label of the NE-Types as they appears in Ionos-Nms. This file is mandatory, the NE-Type
wont be available in Ionos-NMS if its label is not defined.

Ionos-NMS\config\profiler.xml

This file defines how to launch the TPI (Equipment View).


When user double-click on a NE in the Topology View, the Ionos-NMS system parses the profiler.xml
file and finds the relevant command.
The commands contain parameters fields, identified by the syntax ${PARAMETER}
For instance the following line defines the launching command of a SHDSL equipment TPI:

<SHDSL html="${BROWSER} http://${IP}/?community=${PWD}&amp;;,user=${USER}"/>

Before executing this command line Ionos-NMS makes somme substitutions :${Browser} is replaced by
the http browser to launch (IE, Mozilla, etc) ; ${IP} is replaced by the IP of the equipment; and ${PWD}
and ${USER} are replaced by the login/passwd of the TPI user.
Available parameters are :
${BROWSER}
${PWD}
${USER}
${COMMUNITY}
${USEREQUIPMENTLOGIN}

Ionos-NMS\config\ems_trace.properties

Uncomment line
log4j.category.com.sagem.ionos.nms.server.emsapi=DEBUG to get debug
informations on the EmsApi module. The debug infos are saved in file Ionos-NMS\log\app\server.log
Nota: this feature is designed for debug purposes only. It can help the development of BSH, but do not
enable it in a real-life environment as it may slow down the server.

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


Page 126/236
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited

TOPOLOGY MANAGEMENT
2.4.21 - To discover NE from Network (IP discovery)
This procedure is used to scan a range of IP address in order to discover and create Network Elements.
 In the menus bar, select Tools > Discover Network Elements: the Discover Network Elements
window is displayed.
 Click on the Seeds tab.

Figure 2.63 : Discover Network Elements Window


 Configure the Polling Time Delay. The Polling Time Delay is the maximum waiting period to detect
equipment. The default value is 50 milliseconds.
 Click [Add] to add one or several ranges of IP address to be scanned.
 Fill the From IP and the To IP fields to determinate the range of IP addresses.
 Click [Delete] to delete one range of IP address

Figure 2.64 : Window Discover Network Elements/Seeds

 Click on tab [Communities] to define extra SNMP community password.


IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
Page 127/236

TOPOLOGY MANAGEMENT

Figure 2.65 : Window Discover Network Elements/Communities


 Click [Add] or [Delete] to update the list.
Notes:

The "SNMP community" is used to access equipment by SNMP.


Only new SNMP community not predefined in menu "tools > Preference >
Network Element" should be added.

Predefined values are used by default to scan the IP address of the range.
 Click [Start] to discover Network Element. The list of NE discovered is displayed on top of the right
part of the window. The currently scanned IP address is displayed on the Discovery Service Status
part on the bottom of the right part of the window.

Figure 2.66 : Window Discover Network Elements/Discovering


 Click [Stop], if necessary, to stop the discovering of Network Element.
 Click on [OK] on the Status window when the scan of the range is completed.

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


Page 128/236
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited

TOPOLOGY MANAGEMENT

Figure 2.67 : Window Discover Network Elements/Status


Notes:

The Status window is displayed when the scan of the range of IP address is
completed.

Caution: The list of discovered Network Elements may be updated a little while later

 The discovered equipment are created in the Unassigned sub-network

Figure 2.68 : Window Topology view/tree


Notes:

The NE are created with the following fields values:


- Name , the name set for the created Network Element is:
1- The "NE name" read, configured in the discovered equipment.
2- The IP address is used as NE name if the NE name read is not valid
(already used in IONOS-NMS or empty).
Caution: If the NE name read and the IP address of the discovered
Network Element are already used, the NE is not created.
- M1400 name , the M1400 name is build with the four numbers (3
characters each) of the IP address of the discovered NE. The suffix is not
filled.
Example: a NE discovered with the IP address 192.168.17.2 will be
created with the M1400 name: 192168017002 (192 168 017 002)
Caution: If the M1400 name built from the IP address of the discovered
Network Element is already used, the NE is not created
- Type , the type of the discovered equipment (only ADR155C, ADR155CPE,
ADR155E, ADR2500C, ADR2500 EXTRA, ADR622, ADR10000HN, ADR63E1,
FSP2000, FSP3000, SLF-v1, SLF-N, SLF-H, SLA, SLT,FOT C,XP3000)
- IP address Caution: If a NE with the same IP address (primary or
secondary address) is already created, the discovered NE is not created (no
duplication)

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
Page 129/236

TOPOLOGY MANAGEMENT
The traps table of the equipment is automatically updated with the server IP
address if possible.
Caution: The discovery of Network Element is not a multi-client application:
only one discovery should be launch at a time per server. The interruption
(stop) can be performed from any IONOS-NMS client.
An executable file is supplied to launch the discovery of Network Element. To
initialise the range of IP address perform a first NE discovery using IONOSNMS client.
- In the directory chosen for installation (Ionos-NMS or /tools/IONOSNMS by default), select the bin folder.
- Run the command : autodiscovery.bat (PC) or ./autodiscovery.sh
(solaris), then give the login ad password of the user IONOS-NMS and the IP
address of the server.

2.4.22 - To seek an equipment using its name or of its address IP


This procedure is used to seek an equipment in the Topology View .
 In the menus bar, select Edit -> Search NE: the Search NE window is displayed.


Click on Long Name and propose a long name for a research using from the field long name
of the equipment.

Click on M1400 Name and propose a name M1400 for a research using from the field
M1400 Name of the equipment

Click on IP Address and propose an IP address for a research using from the field IP
Address of the equipment

Figure 2.69 : Window Topology view / Search NE


 Click on [Search] to start the research
If an equipment corresponds to the search criterion, the sub-network in which it is present, is displayed
and the equipment is selected
Note : It is possible to launch a search of an equipment since the contextual menu of a
sub-network or of an equipment, then select "Search NE"

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


Page 130/236
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited

TOPOLOGY MANAGEMENT

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
Page 131/236

TOPOLOGY MANAGEMENT

2.5 - ADMINISTRATION OF METERING ELEMENTS (XP3000)


2.5.1 - To create a network element (XP3000)
This procedure is used to add a new Data Concentrator and to position it in the sub-network hierarchy
(explorer).
 In the Explorer or in the Topology View, select a sub-network.
 In the menus bar, select Creation > NE: the Create a Network Element window is displayed.

Figure 2.70 : Window Create a network element (1)


 Use the fields as follows:


Name to enter the mandatory name (40 characters max.) The name can contain any
alphabetical character except the accentuated alphabetical characters (except if the
configuration of the server allows it), numbers or spaces.

M1400 name to enter the type M1400 name which comprises a city name (mandatory
name with 12 characters max.) and a suffix (3 characters): the suffix does not need to be
filled in. The name of city can contain not accentuated alphabetical characters, numbers or
spaces (if configuration of the customer allows it). The suffix contains only numbers.

In case of use of a XP3000 with a activated GPRS interface, the M1400 Name can be filled
with the DC ID for an automatic configuration of the IP address by receiving an GPRS inform
trap ( ex. SAG0790000000 ). In this case, the length of the possible M1400 Name is 14.To
apply this specific function, it is necessary to select first the NE type.

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


Page 132/236
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited

TOPOLOGY MANAGEMENT

Type to enter the equipment type (XP3000 for Data concentrator).

IP address to enter the IP address: if the network element has not been installed, it will
be viewed as inaccessible by IONOS-NMS.

Poll interval to enter the polling interval (by default, 10 min.): in seconds, minutes or
hours. This duration is used to adjust the time interval between two polling operations to
detect any inaccessibility: the value 0 implies that the NE is not polled.

Note:

For equipment XP3000, it is recommended to set the poll interval value to 1


hour. This value can be defined as a default values defined in the "NE
preferences" in order to assign it for each new equipment created.

 Click [Next] when you have filled in the fields: the data customization window is displayed.

Figure 2.71 : Window Create a network element (2)


 In the Customer name field, indicate the customer name (40 characters max.); in the
Location field, indicate the location (40 characters max.), and in the Info field, enter any other
necessary information (80 characters max.).
Note:

In this window, the Creation Date, Last Modification Date and User
Name fields are automatically updated.

 Click [Previous] if you want to return to the previous screen or [Next] to go to the next screen.

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
Page 133/236

TOPOLOGY MANAGEMENT

Figure 2.72 : Window Create a network element (3)


 Use the "SNMP Community" field to define the SNMP community. Use the "Password" fields to
define the equipment passwords for the three types of users: supervisor, operator and observer. By
clicking [Default values], the default values defined in the "NE preferences" are automatically
assigned for each type of NE. Click [Previous] if you want to return to the previous screen or [Next]
to go to the next.

Notes:

The "SNMP community" is used to access the equipment by SNMP.


The 3 passwords are used to access the equipment by its web browser.
The community and passwords must correspond to those stored in the
equipment; otherwise, it will not be accessible by the IONOS-NMS manager.
For a XP3000, enter "public" for community, "secret" for the password
supervisor, "private" for password operator and "public" for password
observer.

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


Page 134/236
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited

TOPOLOGY MANAGEMENT

Figure 2.73 : Window Create a network element (4)


 Click [Create NE] to validate the NE. The results window Create a network element (5) is displayed.

Figure 2.74 : Window Create a network element (5)


 And click [Finish] to finish the operation.
Notes:

When the network element (type XP3000) is created and is accessible, the
IONOS-NMS manager reads the useful information in the equipment and
saves it in the database.
For a NE of type XP3000 the manager updates the general parameter in the
equipment: the name of NE (long name). The list of electrical meters detected
by the data concentrator is automatically stored in Ionos-NMS database.

Caution: For the IONOS-NMS server to receive the traps of the equipment XP3000
which has just been created, the traps table in the equipment must be
updated with the server IP address. To do so, use the web-browser of the
equipment.

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
Page 135/236

TOPOLOGY MANAGEMENT
In the case of equipment XP3000, the use of Proxy HTTP is not implemented.
In the Topology View, and in the explorer, the icon of the NE created is
displayed in the color corresponding to its alarm degree and with its name
written below:
The exclamation point means that the equipment is misaligned.
The question mark means that the equipment is potentially misaligned.
The icon of the sub-network will take the color corresponding to alarm degree
of all NEs and sub-networks which it contains.
The point of exclamation indicates that the sub-network contains at least
one misaligned NE or a misaligned sub-network;
The question mark indicates that the sub-network contains at least one
potentially misaligned NE or a potentially misaligned sub-network, other NEs
and sub-networks being aligned.

 And click [Finish] to finish the operation

2.5.2 - To delete a network element

 In the explorer or in the Topology View, click left on the network element to be deleted.
 In the pop-up menu, select Delete: a confirmation message is displayed.
 Click [Yes] to validate the deletion.

Note:

When the operation is confirmed, the data of the network element are deleted
from the database.

Caution: For XP3000, the electrical meters associated to the deleted data concentrator
are automatically deleted from Ionos-NMS database when no Customer
Delivery Point is defined.

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


Page 136/236
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited

TOPOLOGY MANAGEMENT

2.5.3 - To backup and visualize the data from a Data Concentrator (XP3000)
This procedure is used to back up manually the data from of a NE of type XP3000.
 In the Topology View, click left to select the network element for which you want to back up the data.
 In the pop-up menu, select NE database backup: a message of confirmation is displayed.

Figure 2.75 : Window Network Element Backup


 Confirm the operation to launch the backup of the data: the result window is displayed.

Figure 2.76 : Window Network Element Backup Results

 Click [Finish] to close the window, when it is finished.

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
Page 137/236

TOPOLOGY MANAGEMENT
Notes (1) :

The backup is done in the repertory, specified in the file


"equipementbackup.xml" contained in the folder config of the repertory
chosen for the installation (by default c:\Program Files\IonosNMS\Backup\meterdata
under
Windows
and
/data/IONOSNMS/Backup/meterdata under Solaris).
The file is stored under the repertory yyyy/yyyy-mm/yyyy-mm-dd of the server
Ionos-NMS. The name of the file is form:
NEdatabase-M1400 name-YYYY-MM-DD-0000.csv.gz
For the equipment Data Concentrator, one file per month is also generated
(csv) for each electrical meters (by default c:\Program Files\IonosNMS\log\meter\deliverypoint\dayperiod under Windows and /data/IONOSNMS/log/meter/deliverypoint/dayperiod/ under Solaris for day period and
c:\Program
Files\Ionos-NMS\log\meter\deliverypoint\minperiod
under
Windows and /data/IONOS-NMS/log/meter/deliverypoint/minperiod/ under
Solaris for minute period). These files can be directly open with Excel.
The files are stored under the repertory yyyy/yyyy-mm/of the server IonosNMS. The name of the file is form:
ElectricalMeterADS-day-YYYY-MM.csv for day period and ElectricalMeterADSmin-YYYY-MM.csv for minute period.

Note (2) :

The
tables
contain
metering
data
of
the
31
days
for
PUBLICDCMETERCOUNTERSDAY
table
and
31
days
for
the
PUBLICDCMETERCOUNTERSMN table (the older entries are automatically
removed by IONOS-NMS).
These are the default values. They can be modified in the ServerAdvanced.xml
file
(
DCMeterCounterDayPurgeDelay
and
DCMeterCounterMNPurgeDelay variables ) .

Caution:

It is possible to launch the backup of the database of all the equipment using
a script. Please refer to 1.7 - To save the equipment databases"
A scheduled task is also in charge of performing the backup of all the
accessible equipment (XP3000) declared in IONOS-NMS once a day.

2.5.4 - To launch the equipment view of a Data Concentrator (XP3000)

 In the Topology View, click left to select the network element to be displayed: you can obtain the
equipment view directly by double-clicking.
 In the pop-up menu, select Equipment View: the graphic application is started up and displays the
equipment view.
Note:

For the XP3000 the equipment view is obtained directly from the HTTP web
server embedded in the equipment.

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


Page 138/236
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited

TOPOLOGY MANAGEMENT

Figure 2.77 : Window Network Element Backup Results

2.5.5 - To poll the accessibility of an equipment (XP3000)


This procedure is used to poll the accessibility of NE of type XP3000.
 In the Topology View, click left to select the network element for which you want to check the
accessibility.
 In the pop-up menu, select Force Polling: a message of confirmation is displayed. Confirm and wait
for the response.
Note:

Automatic polling is also provided. The polling interval (by default chose 1
hour): in seconds, minutes or hours can be modified in the NE properties.
This duration is used to adjust the time interval between two polling
operations to detect any inaccessibility: the value 0 implies that the NE is not
polled
For more details on the polling mechanism refer to 6 "Alarms Management"

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
Page 139/236

TOPOLOGY MANAGEMENT

2.5.6 - To audit a network element (XP3000)


This task is used to check the differences in general parameters and Meters list between the database of the
equipment and the one in the IONOS-NMS manager.
 In the explorer or in the Topology View, click left on the network element to be checked.
 In the pop-up menu, select Audit: the Audit Results window is displayed.
Note:

If there is an inconsistency between the manager data and the NE data, the
audit line is displayed red: a message at the top left of the window will then
indicate that the NE is not aligned. At the end of the audit, an ( ! ) is displayed
on the NE icon.

 Select the General tab to display the general parameters

the name of NE
the indication (Yes or No) of inscription of the IP address of IONOS-NMS server in the
table of the receivers of traps of NE (by web-browser, menu DC Configuration/Trap SNMP
Destination) (not supported in current equipment version)

 Select the Meters tab to display the list of electrical Meters discovered by the equipment.

Figure 2.78 : Window Audit Results / General


IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05
Page 140/236
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited

TOPOLOGY MANAGEMENT

Figure 2.79 : Window Audit Results / Meters


 Click [Close] to close the current window.

2.5.7 - To reapply the general parameters in an XP3000 (NMS to NE)


This task allows to reapply the general parameters (name of NE, inscription of IP address of IONOS-NMS
server in the table of receivers of traps if supported) in the NE.
 In the explorer or in the Topology View, click left on the network element to be checked.
 In the pop-up menu, select Audit: the Audit Results window is displayed.

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
Page 141/236

TOPOLOGY MANAGEMENT

Figure 2.80 : Window Audit / General Reapplication


 Select the General tab to reapply the general parameters.
Notes:

If there is an inconsistency between the manager data and the NE data, the
audit line is displayed red: a message at the top left of the window will then
indicate that the general parameters are not aligned.

 Click [NMS to NE general parameters reapplication] to launch the reapplication of general


parameters in the NE: the results window is displayed.

Figure 2.81 : Window General Parameters Reapplication Results

 Double-click on the line of result to obtain the details of reapplication for general parameters.

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


Page 142/236
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited

TOPOLOGY MANAGEMENT

Figure 2.82 : Window General Parameters Reapplication Results/Details

 Click [Close] and [Finish]: the General tab is updated after the reapplication.

2.5.8 - To realign the list of meters


This task is used to realign the list of meter, the information "Customer Delivery Point" and the tariff configured
between Ionos-NMS and the NE.
CAUTION:

This operation is valid only for equipment XP3000.


By default the realignment of the list of meters and of the information
"Customer Delivery Point" is performed automatically when the audit is
launched.
The realignment of the tariff is never performed automatically.
To inhibit the automatic alignment of the list of meters and of the information
"Customer Delivery Point", in the repertory chosen for the installation (by
default Ionos-NMS), select the config folder.
In this folder, open the file server-advanced.xml
Replace the line:
<var name="DCMeterAutoAlignment" type="java.lang.Boolean" value="true"/>

By:
<var name="DCMeterAutoAlignment" type="java.lang.Boolean" value="false"/>
By default, the Boolean is set to true.
The taking into account of the file modification will be effective only after
launching of Server IONOS-NMS.

 In the NML View or in the Topology View, click left on the network element to be checked.
 In the pop-up menu, select Audit: the configuration Audit Results window is displayed.
 Select the Meters tab: the list of electrical meters present in Ionos-NMS and associated to the
equipment is displayed on the left part Database IONOS-NMS, the list of electrical meters present in
the audited equipment is displayed on the right part Database: equipment longname.
Note:

If there is an inconsistency between the manager data and that of the NE in


the tab Meters, the audit line is displayed red: a message at the top left of the
window in the Meters tab will indicate that the list of meters is not aligned.

 If this inconsistency concerns the list itself or the field "Customer Delivery Point", the button [Meters
list re-alignment] is enabled.
Click on this button to launch the re-alignment of the list and of the field Customer Delivery Point:
the result window is displayed.
IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
Page 143/236

TOPOLOGY MANAGEMENT

Notes:

The field "Customer Delivery Point" is realigned from NMS to NE.


The list of Meters is realigned from NE to NMS.

 Click [Close] and [Finish]: the List of meters and the field Customer Delivery Point is updated after
the re-alignment.
 If this inconsistency concerns the tariff of one or several electrical meters, the button [NMS to NE
tariff re-activation] is enabled when the lines to be realigned are selected.
 Click on this button to launch the re-alignment of the tariff (the result window is displayed).
Notes:

If no tariff is configured on NMS side, no inconsistency is considered.


The field "tariff" is realigned only from NMS to NE.

 Click [Finish]. The meters tab is updated.

2.5.9 - To Update the software on a NE element ( Data Concentrator )


This procedure is used to manage the software installed on the concentrator. It provides the
administrator with the version installed on the XP3000 and allows the administrator to update the
version.
 In the menus bar of the Topology View, click Tools > Software Management : the Software
Management window is displayed.

Figure 2.83: Window Software Management window

 Select the mode in which you want to work by ticking the corresponding button:
a/ Inventory to read the inventory
b/ Update to download a new software in the reserve location (if applicable).
c/ Switch to switch the reserve software to the current software.
Notes :

The "Update" is the most complete mode.


Switch mode is unused in case of NE type XP3000.
There is no reserve location for a XP3000.

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


Page 144/236
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited

TOPOLOGY MANAGEMENT
a/ Inventory mode

 Click [Browse] to select, in the tree, the sub-network or NE on which you want to work.
 Tick the equipment type selected : XP3000
 Give the soft type:
For a XP3000 equipment: AMR A (Data Concentrator software)
 Click [Show list] : the inventory of the various current and reserve software versions is
automatically displayed for the equipment selected.
 Click [End session] when you have finnished.

Figure 2.84: Window Software Management window / Inventory

b/ Update mode

 Click [Browse] to select, in the tree, the sub-network or NE on which you want to work.
 Tick the equipment type selected : XP3000
 Give the soft type:
For a XP3000 equipment: AMR A (Data Concentrator software)
 Click [Browse] on the line of selected equipment to select the software to be downloaded.
 Click [Show list] : the inventory of the various current and reserve software versions is
automatically displayed for the equipment selected.
 Click [Download] to run the downloading operation: the results are displayed in the Result area.
Note for DC (1) :
In this Ionos-NMS version, FW starting is the normal case, and
indicates that the download order has been sent to the DC, and that the
upgrade will be done in a few minutes. To check the result, connect to the
Web DC, and read the Firmware version indication.
IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
Page 145/236

TOPOLOGY MANAGEMENT
Note for meter (2) : Download OK status indicates that the meter software is
successfully downloaded in the Data Concentrator. The meter software
download could take a long time. To check the result, select the NML View
window (refer to 3.2.3 -), the meter software version is displayed from the
Meter tab in the Software version column.

 Click [Refresh inventory] to read and update the display of the version numbers of the softwares
installed on the NEs.
 Click [End session] if you have finished.

Caution : To update the Data Concentrator software or Meter software, it is mandatory


to start first the FTP Server, then the TFTP Server.
To start both servers, please refer to 1.2.5 -The application Easy Launcher
under Windows.

c/ Switch Mode

Note :

Switch mode is unused in case of NE type XP3000

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


Page 146/236
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited

TOPOLOGY MANAGEMENT

2.5.10 - To Update the software on a NE element ( List of Meters )

This procedure is used to manage the software installed on the meters. It provides the administrator
with the version installed on the meters and allows the administrator to update the version.

 Firstly it is necessary to build a list of meters to be updated. In the NML View, display a list of meters
( click on Tab [Meters] ). After selection of a list of meters by using all classical possible methods
(refer to 3.2.1 -), click on mouse right button and select the submenu [List/Updated
required/enable] .

Figure 2.85: Selection of a meter list to be updated.


 The column Updated Status in the list is modified with the string Selected. The user can build the
selected meters list by using the submenu [List/Updated required/disable].
 In the menus bar of the Topology View, click Tools > Software Management : the Software
Management window is displayed.
 Select the mode in which you want to work by ticking the corresponding button:
a/ Inventory to read the inventory
b/ Update to download a new software in the reserve location (if applicable).
Notes :

The "Update" is the most complete mode.


Switch mode is unused in case of meters.
There is no reserve location for meters.

a/ Inventory mode

 Click [Browse] to select, in the tree, the sub-network or NE on which you want to work.
 Tick the equipment type selected : XP3000
 Select the meter software type:
For Sagemcom meters: MTR X15 Z0 / MTR X15 Z1 / MTR X27 Z0 / MTR X27 Z0
For Iskra meters: MTR ISK ME171/ MTR ISK ME371

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
Page 147/236

TOPOLOGY MANAGEMENT
 Click [Show list] : the inventory of the various current and reserve software versions is
automatically displayed for the equipment selected.
 Click [End session] when you have finished.

Figure 2.86: Meters Software Management window.


b/ Update mode

 Click [Browse] to select, in the tree, the sub-network or NE on which you want to work.
 Tick the equipment type selected : XP3000
 Give the soft type:
For Sagemcom meters: MTR X15 Z0 / MTR X15 Z1 / MTR X27 Z0 / MTR X27 Z0
For Iskra meters: MTR ISK ME171/ MTR ISK ME371
 Click [Browse] on the line of selected equipment to select the software to be downloaded.
 Click [Show list] : the inventory of the various current and reserve software versions is
automatically displayed for the equipment selected.
 Click [Download] to run the downloading operation: the results are displayed in the Result area.
Note for meter
: Download OK status indicates that the meter software is
successfully downloaded in the Data Concentrator. The meter software
download could take a long time. To check the result, select the NML View
window (refer to 3.2.3 -), the meter software version is displayed from the
Meter tab in the Software version column.

 Click [Refresh inventory] to read and update the display of the version numbers of the software
installed on the NEs.
 Click [End session] if you have finished.
Caution :

To update the Data Concentrator software or Meter software, it is mandatory


to start first the FTP Server, then the TFTP Server.

To start both servers, please refer to 1.2.5 -The application Easy Launcher under Windows.

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


Page 148/236
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited

TOPOLOGY MANAGEMENT
2.5.11 - State Control of Meter Download
The download of software in meters is one operation which duration is function of the credit parameter
and could take many hours. After the start of the update command, the user can at any moment obtain
the remaining time.
 In the NML View, select a DC in the NE list and double-click on it, the Tab Tasks summarises all the
details of all software updates commands started on this DC.

Figure 2.87: Tasks tab for one DC window.


 Double-click on one line in the table provides the details for the selected task including one status (
possible status are download ready, waiting, downloading, download success ou error).

Figure 2.88: Detail of one update firmware task of one DC.


 The download status are also visible for all meters in the list of meters in NML View in the Update
status column.

Figure 2.89: Detail of one update firmware task in the NML view list of meters.
 One process is started to follow the download tasks in the data concentrators. The read period
of these informations is programmable in the [config/server-advanced.xml] in the following variable ( in
secondes ) <var name="GetTaskResultForXP3000" type="java.lang.Integer" value="900" />.
 When started the remainig time is displayed in the remaining time cell.

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
Page 149/236

TOPOLOGY MANAGEMENT

Figure 2.90: Display of the remaining time parameter.

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


Page 150/236
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited

NML View

3. NML View
3.1 - INTRODUCTION
The Network element, electrical meters administration is now handled through the NML view (Network
Management Layer).

This view enables you to:




Select the objects which you want to list (NE, alarm or meters).

List the objects according to presentation criteria.




Access operations to be performed on the objects (audit, backup data, show properties,
etc.).
Display the details of the objects (graphic representation, load curve etc.).

3.2 - NML VIEW WINDOW


The NML View window comprises two areas:


the search area at the left

the details area at the right

Figure 3.1 : NML View: search area (1)

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
Page 151/236

NML View

Figure 3.2 : NML View: details area (2)


The NML View window comprises 5 parts:

 A menus bar, which gives access to the main function menus of the software: File, Edit, Creation,
Action, Tools, Help.
CAUTION

the functions displayed on the menus depend on the object processed by the
manager (sub-network, NE, alarms, meters for Data Concentrator).

 A tools bar (under the menu bar), which gives access to the following functions: create, delete,
dissociate, activate, deactivate, show properties, refresh.
 a search area (left window, below the tools bar), to list the network objects by domains.
Use this window to locate, select and edit the properties of an object.
 A details area (right window, below tools bar) to generate a detailed display of the content of the
objects selected in the search area.
 A current alarms window at the bottom of the screen.
Use this window to display the alarms which have been acknowledged or not, or filtered, from the
network elements.

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


Page 152/236
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited

NML View

3.2.1 - To display / filter a list of objects


This procedure is used to display and filter a list of objects.
 In the Main filter area of the search area, click [Browse] to select a sub-network or an NE.
Notes:

By selecting All, you select all the sub-networks and all the network elements
(value by default).
By ticking the Recursive button, you also select the sub-networks contained
in the selected sub-network.

 In the Result area of the search area, select one or several objects to be listed.
Notes:

By selecting All, you select all the objects.

 Click [Show result] to display the results.


Notes:

The lists selected can each be displayed in a tab.


Use the [Back] and [Next] buttons (at the top left) to recover the previous Main
filter and Result selections.

 Then, select a line in the list and click right to bring up the pop-up menu.

Figure 3.3 : NML View / Main Filter / Meters / Filter

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
Page 153/236

NML View

 In the pop-up menu, click [Filter] then [Customize]: the Filter screen is displayed with around ten
tabs to adjust the filtering.

Figure 3.4 : NML View / Main Filter / Trails / Filter / List configuration

 Tick off [Filters] and configure the values for one or several filters. (For example, in the ADS filter,
enter the value "SAG" or "ISK").
 Use Automatic column resize to modify the size of displayed columns.
 Use Visible columns to select the columns displayed in the list.
 Use Row coloration to select the column which gives the color.
 Use Configuration persistency to save the configuration of the list in database (saved by user)
 Click [Apply] when you have finished, to validate the modifications.
 In contextual menu, click [Save as] to export the displayed list in a file.
 In contextual menu, click [Print] to print the displayed list.

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


Page 154/236
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited

NML View

3.2.2 - List of objects in search area


The lists of objects in the search area for Data Concentrators relates to the following objects:
 NEs. The actions associated with this type of object are detailed in paragraph the administration of
the elements of network of the main help.
 Alarms. The actions associated with this type of object are detailed in the paragraph Alarms
management of the main Help.
 Meters. The actions associated with this type of object are detailed in the paragraph below.

3.2.3 - Data Concentrators


The list of the electrical meter can be obtained for the entire network, by sub-network, for a NE given by
using the function "Set as new input filter" in the current release. Use the filter application described in
the chapter to display / filter a list of objects.
Note:

The following information about the DC are displayed from the NEs tab of the
NML View :
- Software version in the software version column
- Number of connected meters in the number of meters column
- the ID of the DC in the ID column

Figure 3.5: NML View / Main Filter / Data concentrator informations


By double-click on a NE row or by mouse right clicking and click on submenu [Show properties], the
user obtains a list of tabs with the following information : General information, Additional information,
Alarms, Security and Inventory.
IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
Page 155/236

NML View

3.2.4 - Meters
The list of the electrical meter can be obtained for the entire network, by sub-network, for a NE given by
using the function "Set as new input filter" in the current release. Use the filter application described in
the chapter to display / filter a list of objects.
Note:

The information relative to one meter are displayed from the Tab Meters
in the NML :
- ADS
- Delivery point
- Software version
- Type
- Manufacturer
- ID
- Last DC Contact Date
- Contractual Energy Limit and Contractual Energy Limit
- date and Relay State of the last relay command
- Ciphering status

Figure 3.6: General properties of one meter.

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


Page 156/236
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited

NML View

Figure 3.7: NML View / Main Filter / Meters / Save as

Note:

To export the displayed list of meters software version in a file, click [Save as]
in the contextual menu.

Figure 3.8: NML View / Meter general informations


By double-click on a Meter row or by mouse right clicking and click on submenu [Show properties], the
user obtains a list of tabs with the following information : General information, Load curve, Task log.
IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
Page 157/236

NML View

Note:

The following informations about this Meter are displayed from the General
tab of the NML View :
- the reference of the meter in the ADS column
- the associated Delivery point in the Delivery point column
- the Meter Software version in the Software version column
- the Meter type version in the Type column
- the Meter manufacturer in the Manufacturer column
- the ID of the DC in the ID column
- the last contact date in the Last DC Contact Date column

3.2.5 - To set the Meter delivery point


The delivery point is necessary to start actions on meters. For setting or modifying delivery point:
 First select a meter in a meter list, Double-click on it or click on submenu [Show properties], to get
the properties of the meter.
 Set or modify the content of the delivery point field. At the first modification, the [Apply] button is
enabled. Click on it at the end of the filling of the field.
 The delivery point update result window appears and gives the status of the command.

Figure 3.9: Delivery point update

Figure 3.10: Delivery point update result window


IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05
Page 158/236
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited

NML View
3.2.6 - Meters load curve

There are two types of load curve for one meter: minutes (depending of the step for example with
15mn: 96 values per day) and day( 1 value per day ) and for each type two data types .

 By clicking on the [Load Curve] tab, the user can get the corresponding load curves and the data
table of the selected meter.
 By clicking on the [Curve] or on [Data] tab, the user selects the graphical representation or the data
table.
 With the [Data Resolution] combobox and the [Data type] combobox, the user chooses which
curves he wants to display.
 For each curve display, the time interval is programmable by changing the Begin date or the End
date (click on [Change] button).This interval is set at the start of IONOS at
DCMeterCountersDayPurgeDelay ( server-advanced.xml parameter ). If this interval is greater than
7 days, the data resolution combobox is disabled and set to day value.

Figure 3.11: Filling time interval

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
Page 159/236

NML View

Figure 3.12: Minutes Load curve for one meter

Figure 3.13 : Day Load curve for one meter

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


Page 160/236
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited

NML View

Figure 3.14 : Curve Data for one meter


Note:

The data table groups the day and minutes values reed in the database.
The first part in the table provides the day values and the second part the
minutes values.

Figure 3.15: Data information in load curve


Note:

In each graph, it is possible by pointing the cursor on a graph point to get the
corresponding date and value by tooltip.

Note:

In each graph, it is possible by right-clicking to start a graph function popup


menu with for example zoom features.

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
Page 161/236

NML View
The zoom function is also possible by creating a zone ( mouse down, drag
and mouse up)

Figure 3.16: Functionalities in load curve


Note:

In each curve data table, it is possible by right-clicking to start a save feature


of these displayed information into an external file. In each curve data table,
the user can choose which index he wants to display by selecting or not in
the Curve selection pop-up menu.

3.2.7 - Meter actions


IONOS offers the capability to start actions on one or more meters. These actions are sent to the
dedicated concentrator and the concentrator executes the command in the selected meter. Command
results are sent to IONOS server ( SNMP traps of task done , Web service for data results ) and can be
exploited by the user ( stored in database or available in the Ionos client ).
The IONOS P53 provides the following actions :
 Open relay
 Close relay
 Meter indexes
 Change power
 Read power
 Read voltage excursion
 Read the load profile ( type 1 Minutes and type 2 day )
 Settings for red code
3.2.7.1 - Start an action on a meter.

 The first step for starting an action is to select one or more meters in the NML view.
Note:

All selected meters must own a delivery point to be able to start action.

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


Page 162/236
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited

NML View
 By right-clicking on the selected meters, a pop-up appears. Click on [List/Action] to discover the list
of the possible actions. Select one action in this list.

Figure 3.17 : Actions pop-up


 A window is provided to fill the parameters corresponding to the action. Depending of the action the
values which must be filled are in red background colour. With the two last parameters ( Urgency
level and Issue date ), the user can choose when the action will be started: urgent/standard/at
date. In case of at date urgency level, the user must gives the start date in the following format (
JJ/MM/AAAA HH:MM:SS ).When all parameters are valid, the user can start by clicking on the [OK]
button.

Figure 3.18 : Action parameters window

3.2.7.2 - Status of an action .

 In the NML view select one meter in a meter list, double-click on it to open the right part of the NML
view with the properties of the meter.
 Select the tab [Task log].In this tab the user can found information about each task:
Task Id / Action name / state / submit date / end date

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
Page 163/236

NML View
Note:

there are 4 possible state for one task : In progress/Aborted/Error/OK.


[In progress]: the action have been sent to the DC and wait for task done
message from DC.
[Aborted]: the action is aborted by Ionos or manually by user command.
[Error]: the DC have sent an error message about the execution of the action.
[OK]: action is terminated with success. Result if there is are available in
IONOS.

 By doing periodically [Refresh] command, the state can be updated.


 The user can change the task state with a right-click ion one or more ( multi selection is possible )
selected task.
Note:

From In progress state the user can change to aborted state by clicking in
the submenu of the pop-up on [Abort].
From the other task states, the user can clear the task ( disappear from the
task table ) by clicking in the submenu of the pop-up on [Clear].

Figure 3.19 : Action Task log window with results


3.2.7.3 - Result of an action .

 In the NML view select one meter in a meter list, double-click on it to open the right part of the NML
view with the properties of the meter. Open the [Task log] tab to see the state of the action.
IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05
Page 164/236
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited

NML View
 When the action state becomes OK, the user can access to the result of the action if this action
returns some information ( for example : Read power, Read voltage excursion, Change power,
meter Indexes) by double-clicking on one selected action.

Figure 3.20 : Clear or Abort one task.


Note:

After one Read Power or one Change Power, the 2 information Contractual
Energy Limit and Contractual Power Limit, which appear in the tab General
of each meter, are updated and dated automaticaly visible after one refresh.
After one Open relay or one Close relay, the information Last Relay
Command, which appear in the tab General of each meter, are updated and
dated automaticaly visible after one refresh ( with green background when
closed and red when open ).
After one Read Load Profile, the read data are written in database and can be
dispalyed in the tab Load curve.

Figure 3.21 : results of task visible in general tab.

3.2.8 - Tracking of multiple meter actions

Ionos provides the feature to start the same meter action on many meters in a single command ( select
more than one meter in a meter list in the NML view ). To track the results more easily than getting the
individual result of each action, Ionos provides a summarize of results with the Global task
Management feature.
 Click on the menu [Tools/Global Task Management] in the menubar.

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
Page 165/236

NML View

Figure 3.22 : Start of Global Task management.


 The opened window lists all the multiple meter actions started from Ionos. A global status is also
provides.

Figure 3.23 : Gobal Task Management window.


 By clicking on one of the listed tasks, detail of the selected task appears : number of impacted DC,
number of impacted meters and percent of terminated actions.

Figure 3.24 : Task status in Gobal Task management.

3.2.9 - Data concentrator Task.


In case of Red code management , Ionos provides two meter tasks :

The first one allows the user to configure the red Code parameters for each meters  code red
settings is accessible at meter level.

The second one allows the user to valid all the meters which have the same Red Code
identificator. This command is sent from DC to meters in broadcast mode.

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


Page 166/236
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited

NML View
That is the reason why the command start is placed at NE level..

Figure 3.25 : Start of red code enable.


 Select one DC in one NE list in the NML view.
 Open the sub-menu ( right-click ).
 Start the meter action by clicking on the sub-menu [Red code Enable].
 Double-click on the selected DC line and show action result in the Tab [Tasks].
Note:

From the Tasks tab, the user can at any time abort one started ( right-click
on the selected task and click on [Abort] ) or clear one terminated/aborted/in
error ( right-click on the selected task and click on [Clear] ).

Figure 3.26 : Clear/Abort of one meter action at NE level.

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
Page 167/236

NML View

3.2.10 - Security management between data concentrator and meters.

The management of security between Dc and meters needs some fucntionnalities at Ionos level .Some are
automaticaly started at meter discover by Ionos server and other are manually started from Ionos client .
Some initialisation are also needed.

3.2.10.1 - Initialisation

One high level flag allows to enable or disable the ciphering feature. This flag is located in the serveradvanced.xml file: if True, the management is enabled.
<var name="DCMeterCipheringActivation" type="java.lang.Boolean" value="true"/>

One global provisioning file including the ciphering information for all new added meters is necessary
Default_Meters_Conf.dat.
This file contains :
- the serial number ( ADS )
- one flag for the mode : crypted or not ( true/false )
- one ciphering key on 16 bytes (in case of crypted mode).
This file is provided by factory ( crypted ) and sent to Ionos installer.
Note:

The ciphering feature does not run on ISKRA meter.

3.2.10.2 - Modifications in the NML view due to ciphering

One CipheringStatus field have been added to the meter list in the NML View to follow all the
diferent states of the ciphering process.

Figure 3.27 : Ciphering Status field in the NML View.


The different possible values are :
 Desactivated : normal mode, no ciphering.
 Missing Conf Data : configuration information for this meter not included in the configuration file.
 Activated : the ciphering process have been terminated successfully
 Failed : send of ciphering meter action failed (.spec Failed)
 Change Key Failed : the new ciphering key was not updated.
 In progress : ciphering meter action is in progress
 Install Failed : MeterInstall action has failed
 Install in progress : Meter install is in progress, wait for answer of DC.
IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05
Page 168/236
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited

NML View
3.2.10.3 - Ciphering meter actions.

One DC ( minimum version x.14 ) provides some specific meter actions for ciphering :


Encryption_programOneMeterInDC : allows to write in DC database ciphering parameters.

 Meter Install : meter install process


 Encryption_ChangeKeyInMeter : provides the capability to change the ciphering key in one
merter.
3.2.10.4 - One meter discover in ciphering mode.

When Ionos discover a new meter with one Audit command or by receiving a new meter discoder
SNMP trap a discover process is started :

If the flag DCMeterCipheringActivation is FALSE ( ciphering feature disabled ) :


- Set the CipheringStatus to DESACTIVATED
- Send one Encryption_ProgramOneMeterInDc command with Cipher parameter at normal
mode).
If the flag DCMeterCipheringActivation is TRUE ( ciphering feature enabled ) :
-

Read the configuration file Default_Meters_Conf. and search information concerning the meter (
search by ADS ).

If the meter is not in the configuration file, set the CipheringStatus to Missing Conf Data . the
meter is not usable and the data concentrator can not communicate with it .

If the meter is present in the configuration file and its mode flag is False, the CipheringStatus is set
to DESACTIVATED, and the meter action Encryption ProgramOneMeterInDc is started with
Cipher parameter at normal mode.

If the meter is present in the configuration file and its mode flag is True, Ionos starts Encryption
ProgramOneMeterInDc action meter with the default key and the Cipher mode to MUTE.
Ciphering Status is set to default in progress .
o When receiving Task Done trap, Ionos starts a MeterInstall.spec action. Ciphering
Status is set to Install in progress .
 When receiving Task Done trap, Ionos will generate a newciphering key and sent it
with the .spec Encryption_ChangeKeyinMeter meter action.
Ciphering Status is set to in progress . If the last action fails, status changes
to Change Key Failed .On receiving task done, Ciphering Status is set to
Activated .
 When receiving Task Failed trap, Ciphering Status is set to Install Failed .
o When receiving Task Failed trap, Ciphering Status is set to Change key Failed .

3.2.10.5 - Meter move from one DC to another.

When Ionos discovers that a meter changes of data concentrator during an audit, it will get the ciphering data
in the database and sends its in the new concentrator.

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
Page 169/236

NML View
3.2.10.6 - Start of ciphering specific meter actions.

Ionos provides for each meters four new meter actions which are runable etheir automatically during the new
meter discover process, during the move of one meter from one DC to another or manually like the other
meter actions.
 To start these specific ciphering meter actions: select one meter in one meter list in the NML View.
Right-Click on submenu [list/Security]. Function of the Ciphering Status ,only some security actions
are enabled.
 For these specific actions and like for the standard ones, one parameter window is opened for filling
date start parameters.

Figure 3.28 : Manually start of security actions.


The Generate New Key is only possible when meter are is state Activated or Change Key Failed . This
new key is stored in database and after that .spec Encryption_ChangeKeyinMeter is sent.
During the execution, CipheringStatus is set to in progress
On Task Failed, Ciphering Status is changed to Change Key Failed .On Task Done, Ciphering Status
is changed to Activated .

3.2.10.7 - Modifications of ciphering mode after first installation.

 The provisioning file can be modify at any moment. The user can change the ciphering mode of one
meter from crypted to uncrypted for example. For taking this change into account one menu have
been added in NML View menubar : [Tools/Get New Ciphering Datas].

Figure 3.29 : Start of updating of cyphering information.

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


Page 170/236
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited

NML View
 The start of this menu restarts the complete ciphering installation process for only the meters which
have changed our ciphering mode..

3.2.11 - User rights management for metering features.


Ionos provides the capability to manage the users rights for metering features.
 Click on main menubar on menu [ View/Admin view ].
 Select one existing profile and click on tab [ Authorization ] .
 In the treeview of the profile select [Metering Management] .
 By enabling or disabling any feature items, the user can modify the execution rights of the selected
feature.

Figure 3.30 : Metering features user rights management.

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
Page 171/236

METER ACTIONS

4. METER ACTIONS

4.1 - THE IONOS SYSTEM INFORMATION


The IonosSI ( System Information ) provides to the user the possibility to send commands to IONOS
server through a SOAP interface. These action commands are sent to the selected meter through the
right Data Concentrator by using a demonstrator.
The data concentrator stores a lot of command files ( .spec files ) which can be started by the IONOS
server by using the SI demonstrator. These actions allow reading or writing parameters of meters.
For using this interface, it is necessary to give for each meter a delivery point.

4.2 - IONOSSI : STARTING AND CONFIGURING


 How to start the IonosSI demonstratror : in the IONOS directory : run the following file
[\bin\DemoInformationSystem\IonosSI.bat] .

Figure 4.1 Ionos SI demonstrator

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


Page 172/236
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited

METER ACTIONS
 Click in menu [File/Change IP] to configure the Ionos server IP address.

Figure 4.2 : Ionos server IP address

 Click on tab [Delivery Points]


 Delivery point creation: click on button [Declare delivery point] , fill the 2 fields
Note:

Delivery Point : the name of delivery point


Meter : the ADS of the meter ( for exemple : SAG0753000909 )

Figure 4.3 : Delivery point creation

4.3 - IONOSSI : SENDING COMMANDS


 Select a delivery point in the delivery point list
 click on [Send command] button.
 Choose an action in the action combobox
 Some commands have parameters which must be filled by the user. By choosing the commands, a
parameter list is displayed. The user can modify the value of the parameters.

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
Page 173/236

METER ACTIONS

Figure 4.4 : Modify the parameter values

 When parameters are correctly filled , the user can start the command by clicking on [OK] button.
 When a command is started ( with an OK status in the log window ), the user can use the [Tasks]
tab to analyze the result of the command execution .This tab shows the command the user have
sent. By selecting one of these commands in the list and clicking on the [Get Task Info] button, the
user gets the results of the selected command. If the state result is OK, by clicking on the selected
line, the software provides the results in a table.

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


Page 174/236
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited

METER ACTIONS

Figure 4.5 : Getting result of one command

4.4 - IONOSSI : STARTING AND CONFIGURING


The following actions are provided in IONOS P52 Rev4.

ReadPower.serv : read the Contractual Energy Limit and the Contractual Power Limit
of a meter

MeterIndexes.serv : read a list of indexes of Sagemcom meter

MeterIndexesIskra.Serv : : read a list of indexes of Iskra meter





ChangePower.serv : change the Contractual Energy Limit and the Contractual Power
Limit of a meter
RedCodeSetting : send the settings of a Red Code
RedCodeEnable : send a red code enable by broadcast to all the meters which have the
same red code id .( send the command to on of meter of the Id group )

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
Page 175/236

ALARMS MANAGEMENT

5. ALARMS MANAGEMENT
5.1 - INTRODUCTION
The NMS manager enables network supervision and checks NE accessibility by a configurable polling
mechanism.
All the alarms are generated by the NE to the manager by SNMP messages. IONOS-NMS then computes the
status of the NE alarms and that of the sub-networks and STM-n links.
The status of the trails, VC4 bearer trails and STM-n links is only defined when the user activates the trail
alarm Propagation menu.
Alarm types
The alarms belong to two categories:


EML alarms.


Network alarms (faults on traffic).
Certain alarms, such as loss of signal on the STM-n interfaces, form part of both categories (alarms on
reception or transmission card, alarms on STM-n link, etc.).
Alarm states
Operation of an alarm forms part of a cycle which comprises 4 states:


no alarm :

alarm not acknowledged:

alarm acknowledged : alarm ACK.

Alarm disappeared : alarm OFF.

alarm OFF.
alarm ON.

Status of trails
The trails, VC-4 bearer trails and STM-n links can have the following statuses:


not valid (extremities inaccessible).

no input signal.

alarm: traffic cut or traffic degraded according to the alarm.

no alarm (OK).

Animation of icons and links


In the explorer and in the sub-network view, the color of the icons (networks, Nes and links) change in
accordance with the level of severity of the alarms which they contain:


no alarm on NE or on link (or warning alarm): green

minor alarm on NE or on link: yellow

major alarm on NE or on link: red

critical alarm on NE or on link : pink

NE inaccessible : blue

Two colors are displayed on NE icon or subnetwok icon :


- the color of background icon corresponds to the maximum level of severity of the not acknowledged alarms
which the server contains.
- the color of edge icon corresponds to the maximum level of the all alarms (acknowledged and not
acknowledged) which the server contains.
The sub-network takes the colors of the NE having the alarm with the highest severity level.

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


Page 176/236
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited

ALARMS MANAGEMENT
Note :

In the case of an EXT155HA, there are three colored icons, one for the logical
NE which gives the synthesis of color of two pfysical Nes.

5.2 - MANAGEMENT OF CURRENT ALARMS


5.2.1 - To display the current alarms
You can display all the current alarms (EMS and NMS alarms) at the bottom of the main view window, tab
Alarms (1).
Each alarm from the SNMP messages is registered and updated in real time in the log.

Figure 5.1 : Window Topology View / Fault View


In the table, each line takes the color corresponding to the level of severity of the alarm which it contains:


gray : warning.

yellow: for a minor alarm.

red: for a major alarm.

Pink : for a critical alarm.


blue : inaccessibility alarm.
The alarms are displayed in accordance with the selection in increasing alphabetical order () or decreasing
alphabetical order () (Begin represents the default sort) with the following parameters (2) (3) :


Equipment : equipment name

Location : card and port, cause of alarm.

Event type : type of alarm.

Status : level of severity of alarm.

Ack : indicates if alarm has been acknowledged (yes or no).

Ack user : indicates the name of user who acknowledged the alarm.
IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
Page 177/236

ALARMS MANAGEMENT


Ack date : indicates the date on which alarm was acknowledged by user.

Begin date : date on which alarm was received by manager.

NE date : date at which alarm was sent by NE.

The menus bar gives access to the following functions (also accessible in pop-up menu when you select an
alarm):


Add a filter on the contents of the selected cell

Disable filtering function

Marks the alarms as treated (Acknowledge)

Marks the alarms back as not treated (Unacknowledge)

Clear selected Alarms

Show alarm properties and propagation

Locate the NE impacted by the alarm

Enabled unacknowledge cleared Alarm gestion (not accessible in pop-up menu)

Show unacknowledge cleared Alarm window (not accessible in pop-up menu)

Figure 5.2 : Window Topology View / Fault View / Pop-up menu


Notes :

(1) At the bottom of the main menu to the right, you can immediately check
the number of current alarms by 4 numbers: polling alarms (blue), major
alarms (red), minor alarms (yellow) and other alarms (blue or gray).
(1) The current alarms table can be detached (to use the drawing pin at the
top on the right of the list) in a window which can be always visible (to use the
icon in tools bar Activate/Deactivate the window always visible).
(2) To sort on another parameter, click on the parameter in the parameters bar
of the log: once selected, choose the appropriate marker ( by increasing
order by decreasing order).
(3) To update the date and time of the equipment, use the menu: SNMP View >
Equipment.
(4) use the pop-up menu to access to following functions :
. [Filter selection] to add a filter on the contents of the selected cell
. [Enable filters] to activate/deactivate filters
. [Customize] to configure filters and the display of the list
. [Find] to search a display string
. [Save as] to export the displayed list
. [Print] to print displayed list

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


Page 178/236
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited

ALARMS MANAGEMENT
5.2.2 - To acknowledge a current alarm
This procedure is used to acknowledge an alarm.
 In the alarms table, select an alarm.
 Click right to bring up the pop-up menu.
 In this menu, select [Acknowledge] : Yes is displayed in the Ack field (1) (2) (3).
Notes :

(1) You can use the Acknowledge function in the tools bar to directly
acknowledge several alarms selected using the Ctrl keys.
(2) This operation contributes to changing the color of the NE icon in the
Topology View; the alarm is no longer taken into account in the icon
animation computation.
(3) The user name and date of acknowledgement are updated in
corresponding columns.

5.2.3 - To unacknowledge a current alarm


This procedure is used to unacknowledge an alarm: the alarm returns to its initial status before
acknowledgement.
 Select the alarm in the alarms table.
 Click right to bring up the pop-up menu.
 In this menu, select [Unacknowledge] : No is displayed in the Ack field (1) (2) (3).
Notes :

(1) You can use the Unacknowledge function in the tools bar to directly
unacknowledge several alarms selected using the Ctrl key.
(2) This operation contributes to changing the color of the NE icon in the
Topology View; the alarm is again taken into account in the icon animation
computation.
(3) The user name and date of acknowledgement are cleared in corresponding
columns.

5.2.4 - To filter current alarms by criteria


This procedure is used to filter the alarms which you want to display .
 Click right to bring up the pop-up menu.
 In this menu, select [List] : A new pop-up menu is displayed.
 Select [Customize] : The List Configuration window is displayed (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6).

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
Page 179/236

ALARMS MANAGEMENT

Figure 5.3 : Window Topology View / Fault View / List configuration


 Check [Filters] and give all the criteria to be applied for the alarms filtering.
 Click on [Apply] to validate the operation : the alarms corresponding to the filtering criteria defined
are displayed in the alarms table.
 In the tools bar, click on the button [Enable filtering function] to activate or to deactivate the filter:
Notes :

(1) To add a filter, it is also possible to select a cell, then to activate the button
[Add a filter on the contents of the selected cell] in the tools bar. A filter
activated on the contents of the selected cell.
(2) Use Automatic column resize to modify the size of displayed columns.
(3) Use visible columns to choose the columns displayed in the list.
(4) Use Row coloration to color the alarms table, according to the severity
of alarms.
(5) Use line wrap mode to display the contents of a cell on several lines.
(6) Use Configuration persistency to back up the configuration of the list of
current alarms table (the backup in database is made for each user when the
IONOS-NMS client will be closed.

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


Page 180/236
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited

ALARMS MANAGEMENT
Note :

To display the status of alarm for SDH and WDM links, bearers, and SDH and
WDM trails, use visible columns to add the Status column and use Row
coloration to color according to the severity of the Status.
This function is available by default for a user with the administrator rights.

5.2.5 - To locate a current alarm


This procedure is used to locate the equipment in which an alarm is located.
 Select the alarm in the alarms table.
 Click right to bring up the pop-up menu.
 In this menu, select [Locate] : the NE in which the alarm is located is selected in the explorer and in
the view.
Note :

You can also use the Locate function in the tools bar to directly locate the NE
in the Topology View.

5.2.6 - To display the properties of a current alarm


This procedure is used to display the properties of an alarm.
 Select the alarm in the alarms table.
 Click right to bring up the pop-up menu.
 In this menu, select [Properties] : the Alarm Properties / Information window is displayed.

Figure 5.4 : Window Alarms properties / Information


In Details area, the NE name, event type, its location, its severity, the date on which alarm was received by
manager, the date at which alarm was sent by NE and acknowledgement informations can be visualized.
Notes :

(1) You can also use Properties in the tools bar to display the properties of
an alarm.

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
Page 181/236

ALARMS MANAGEMENT
(2) it is also possible to visualize the properties of an alarm, by using menu
Properties in the contextual menu of an alarm selected in the list of alarms of the
NML View (Alarms tab).

5.2.7 - To display the alarms unacknowledged cleared alarms


This procedure is used to display the cleared alarms, never acknowledged.
 To activate the function, in tool bar click icon
 In tool bar, Click icon

: the window Unacknowledged cleared and new Alarms is displayed.

 Check [Show Cleared Alarms list]


 The function is activated. All the alarms unacknowledged and cleared are displayed on top of the
window.

Figure 5.5 : Window Unacknowledged cleared and new Alarms

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


Page 182/236
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited

ALARMS MANAGEMENT
 Click, if necessary, [Clear New Alarms] to clear all the alarms of this list.
 Click [Close] to close the window.
 To deactivate the function, uncheck [Show Cleared Alarms list] in the window.
Notes :

(1) If the function is activated, the window is displayed automatically when a


new alarm not acknowledged is cleared.
(2) The menus [Filter] and [Save as] are available in pop-up menu.
(3) To deactivate both functions of the window, in tool bar click on icon

5.2.8 - To display the new alarms


This procedure is used to display the new alarms.
 To activate the function, in tool bar click icon
 In tool bar, Click icon

: the window Unacknowledged cleared and new Alarms is displayed.

 Check [Show New Alarms list]


 The Function is activated. All the alarms new are displayed on the bottom of the window

Figure 5.6 : Window Unacknowledged cleared and new Alarms


 Click, if necessary, [Clear New Alarms] to clear all the alarms of this list.
IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
Page 183/236

ALARMS MANAGEMENT
 Click [Close] to close the window.
 To deactivate the function, un-check [Show New Alarms list] in the window.
Notes :

(1) If the function is activated, the window is displayed automatically when a


new alarm appears.
(2) The menus [Filter] and [Save as] are available in pop-up menu.
(3) To deactivate both functions of the window, in tool bar click on icon

5.2.9 - To filter current alarms by multi-criteria


This procedure is used to filter the alarm or event which you want to display.
New fields are displayed when the multi-criteria filtering is activated. See 1.2.3.27 - To configure the
alarm multi-criteria filtering.
Then, its possible to apply filters with multi-criteria on alarm in the Fault View, Fault Log, NML View,
Properties/Alarms, Unknownledge cleared and New Alarms windows and to save them. Also, its
possible to apply filters with multi-criteria in the Log View for the Event Log tab.
Notes :

Only the columns with a string value as filter condition can be used for multi-criteria
filters.
There is no multi-criteria filter for Status, Ack and Date columns.

 Right-click to bring up the pop-up menu.


 In this menu, select [List]: A new pop-up menu is displayed.
 Select [Customize] : The List configuration window is displayed.

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


Page 184/236
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited

ALARMS MANAGEMENT

Figure 5.7 : Window Topology View /Fault View / List Configuration / Multi-criteria filtering
 Check [Filters] and give all the criteria to be applied for alarms or events filtering
 Click [Next] to add another filter for the same column
Note(s) : On the last [Next] action, if the field is empty, the next [Next] action is to display the
first filter.
To delete a filter, select the filter by clicking on the [Next] button and erase the
content of the string value in the combobox.
 Do the same actions for each column (if necessary)
 Select a And or Or condition for the choice between columns
 Select a And or Or condition for the choice between filter in the same column. This filter is
applied in all columns.
 Click on [Apply] button to validate the operation: the alarms or events corresponding to the
filtering criteria defined are displayed.
And/Or
 Enter a filter name in the Save Filter as field. Only alphanumeric characters are valid and the
maximum length is 20 characters for the filter name
 Click on [Save Filter as] button to register the filter. The filter name is added in the Filters list
combobox.
To load a filter previously saved:
IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
Page 185/236

ALARMS MANAGEMENT
 Select the filter name from the Filter list combobox.
 Click on [Load] button.
 Click on [Apply] button if necessary: the alarms or events corresponding to the filter are
displayed.
Note: It exists two filters by default in the Filters list to reset the alarm filtering (empty) and to reset
the event filtering (emptyEventlog).

To delete a filter saved:


 Select the filter name from the Filter list combobox.
 Click on [Delete] button and confirm by clicking on the [Yes] button.
To export the Filters configuration file(s) from one client to another one:
 In the repertory chosen for the installation (by default Ionos-NMS), select the Config/Filters folder.
 In this folder, select and copy the alarmsFilters.xml file (it containts the filters description) to the
DIR_IONOS/config/Filters folder of the client destination.
Caution: The taking into account of the file modification will be effective only after launching of Client
IONOS-NMS.

5.2.10 - To activate the send of mails on alarms modification


This procedure is used to send a mail on alarms modification :


raised alarm

cleared alarm

acknowledged alarm


unacknowledged alarm.
A mail is send X minutes (maximum) after alarm modification (see 1.2.3.12 - to activate this function).
X is defined for each type of alarm severity in file timers.xml. (see 1.2.3.13 The mail gives :


the alarms modification of higher level since the last mail

the total of raised alarms

the total of raised and unacknowledgedalarms

the number of raised alarms by level of severity (since the last mail)

the number of cleared alarms by level of severity (since the last mail)

the number of acknowledged alarms by level of severity (since the last mail)

the number of unacknowledged alarms by level of severity (since the last mail)


the detail for each alarm
Example for a short mail:
Subject: Alarms activity : 5 Inaccessible alarms raised on VZY-P1198715
5 Inac raised on Y-P1198715
Status :
Unack : 5 Inac,1 Critic,10 Maj,8 Min,21 Warn
All : 5 Inac,1 Critic,10 Maj,8 Min,21 Warn
Example for a complete mail:
Subject: Alarms activity : 1 Inaccessible alarm raised on P1198383
IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05
Page 186/236
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited

ALARMS MANAGEMENT
1 Inaccessible alarm raised on P1198383
Alarm Status :
Unack alarms
All alarms

:
:

Activity Summary :
Raised
Cleared
Acknowledged
Unacknowledged

:
:
:
:

Activity

26 Major, 10 Minor, 81 Warning


26 Major, 10 Minor, 81 Warning

1 Inaccessible, 1 Major
2 Inaccessible, 1 Critical, 1 Major

Equipment

Location

Raised and cleared 155c104/104


14:37:36

Event type

BOARD SLOT B

Cleared
63e99/99
03/12/04 14:37:16
Raised and cleared 63e99/99
Cleared
Nice26/1

Status
defective

Ack
Major

Begin date
no

03/12/04

Synchro NE Data failure (Configuration Number) Critical

Polling
Inaccessible
Polling
Inaccessible no

no

no
03/12/04 14:38:44
03/12/04 14:37:28

5.2.11 - To activate the send of mails on critical alarm


This procedure is used to send a mail on critical alarms :
A mail is send a few second after a critical alarm is raised (see 1.2.3.14 - to activate this function).
It is possible to sent a mail on critical alarm in short mode in relation to the sub-network, NE type and NE
name and to configure the format of the sent mail (the length of the message).
The mail gives the detail for the alarm.
Example for short mail:
<format>short</format>
<object_short> Eqpt: $EQUIPEMENT - $LOCATION - Evt: $EVENT_TYPE - Begin: $BEGIN_DATE
</object_short>

Subject: Eqpt: Paris - LocalIdu

- Evt: FERMETURE_1 - Begin: 29/09/10 10:25:12

Example for short mail (event type in the list)


<format>short</format>

In the following exemple the event type is RadioLinkFailure with a major severity
Subject: Eqpt: SLF-HC_137 - Loc: LocalIdu - Evt: RadioLinkFailure Beg: 03/03/09 15:50:28 - End:
Example for long mail:
<format>long</format>

Subject : 1 Critical alarm raised on Ionos-NMS


Content :
Equipment: SagemLinkParis
Location: Main Board
IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
Page 187/236

ALARMS MANAGEMENT
Event type: Power Failure
Begin date: 03/12/08 14:37:36
Example for complete mail:
<format>complete</format>

Subject: Alarms activity : 1 Inaccessible alarm raised on VZY-P1198715


Alarm Status :
Unack alarms : 1 Inaccessible
All alarms
: 1 Inaccessible
Activity Summary :
Raised
: 1 Inaccessible
Cleared
:
Acknowledged :
Unacknowledged :
Activity
Raised

Equipment
Location
SLF-N-62.122

Event type
Status
Ack
Polling
Inaccessible no

Begin date
03/12/08 10:39:47

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


Page 188/236
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited

HISTORIES MANAGEMENT

6. HISTORIES MANAGEMENT
In the menus bar, select View > Log View : the Log View screen is displayed and replaces the topology
main view (1).
This screen has five tabs corresponding to the five logs (2) :


Event Log, to display the events history send by the Nes.

Fault Log, to display the alarms history.

Server Log to display the history of user actions.

Database Log to display the history of used database (Oracle database).

SDH Trails Log to display the history of the status of real time supervised SDH trails.

Notes :

(1) To return to the main view, select View > Topology View in the menus bar.
(2) The number of lines per page in the logs can be configured from 200 to
10000 by clicking on button [View Size]
(3) Use the tools bar to access the following functions:

[Add a filter on the contents of the selected cell] to add a filter.

[Disable filtering function] to activate/deactivate the filters.

[Show log record details] to display the properties of a recording.

[Purge all log entries from database] to purge the opened log.




[Refresh the log records] to refresh the selected log or to return to the first
page.
[Stop the log records reload] to stop the display of the log.
(3) Use the pop-up menu to access the following functions:
. [Filter selection ] to add a filter on the contents of a selected cell.
. [Enable filters] to activate/deactivate the filters.
. [Customize] to configure filters and the display of the list.
. (Find] to search a display string.
. [Save as] to export the displayed list.
. [Print] to print the current list.

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
Page 189/236

HISTORIES MANAGEMENT
a/ By selecting the Event Log, the following screen is displayed (3).

Figure 6.1 : Window Log View / Event Log

b/ By selecting the Fault Log, the following screen is displayed (3).

Figure 6.2 : Window Log View / Fault Log

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


Page 190/236
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited

HISTORIES MANAGEMENT
Notes :

The parameters are the same as for the current alarms log (see 5.2.1 -) with
the added End field to indicate the date on which the end of alarm was
received by the manager.
Each line takes a color corresponding to the level of severity of the alarms
contained in the equipment :
. gray : warning.
. yellow : minor alarm.
. red : major alarm.
. blue : polling alarm.

c/ By selecting the Server Log tab, the following screen is displayed (3):

Figure 6.3 : Window Log View / Server Log


d/ By selecting the Database Log tab, the following screen is displayed (3):

Figure 6.4 : Window Log View / Database Log


IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
Page 191/236

HISTORIES MANAGEMENT
Note :

The actions which are stored in the dtabase log are:


- The database creation
- The last forced backup or automatic backup
- The database restoration
- The database migration
The database log cannot be purged.

e/ By selecting the SDH Trails Log tab, the following screen is displayed (3):

Figure 6.5 : Window Log View / SDH Trails Log

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


Page 192/236
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited

PREFERENCES MANAGEMENT

7. PREFERENCES MANAGEMENT
7.1 - INTRODUCTION
The preferences management functions are used to modify the default values initialized at the start of the
application, concerning the icons used for sub-network and for Nes, the IP address of server, the default
configuration of sounds, the default parameters of Nes, the default parameters of STM-n Links, the default
parameters of trails, the default parameters of rings, the default parameters of VCGroups, the default
parameters of Ethernet Links, the default parameters of Ethernet services, the default configuration of profiles
used for QOS parameters of Ethernet services.

7.2 - PREFERENCES
7.2.1 - To change the IP address of the server
 In the menus bar, select Tools > Preferences : the Preferences screen is displayed.
 In this screen, select the Name Server tab.

Figure 7.1 : Window Preferences / IONOS-NMS


 In the Host field, specify the IP address of the server.
 In the Port field, specify the port number (always 1099).
 Click [OK] when you have finished.
Note :

This modification will be taken into account only on one new launching of the
Application Client (after closing of IONOS-NMS Client).

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
Page 193/236

PREFERENCES MANAGEMENT

7.2.2 - To change an icon image


This procedure is used to modify the icon displayed on Topology View for each type of NE or each type of
sub-network.
 In the menus bar, select Tools > Preferences : the Preferences screen is displayed.
 In this screen, select the Topology View tab.

Figure 7.2 : Window Preferences / Topology View

 Select the NE Types tab (for the NE, VNE, FOT, ADR, FMX, FH icons) or the Group Types tab (for
the sub-network icons).
 In the left window, click on the icon for which you want to change the image: the current icon is then
displayed in the right window.
 Click [Browse] to browse for a new image.
 Click [Apply] to apply the new image selected.
 Click [OK] when you have finished.
Note :

By clicking [Default Icon], you select the default icon assigned to represent
the network element.
The icons by default are stored in directory
netpilot/webapp/root/resources/topo/default.
New icons can be created by taking the existing icons as model.

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


Page 194/236
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited

PREFERENCES MANAGEMENT

7.2.3 - To change the default properties of the Nes


This procedure is used to modify the default values of NE parameters.
 In the menus bar, select Tools > Preferences : the Preferences screen is displayed.
 In this screen, select the Nes tab.

Figure 7.3 : Window Preferences / Nes

 In the SNMP request configuration for all Nes area, enter the timeout between two polling requests.
 In the Default community passwords area, enter for each type of NE :
a/ the SNMP community ( secret by default)
b/ the Supervisor password ( secret by default)
c/ the Operator password ( private by default)
d/ the Observer password ( public by default)
 In the Default value for NE creation area, enter:
a/ the default NE type in the Default NE type field
b/ the default poll interval in the Default Poll Interval field
 Click [OK] when you have finished.

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
Page 195/236

PREFERENCES MANAGEMENT

7.2.4 - To change the default properties of sounds


This procedure is used to activate or deactivate the sounds on alarm apparition or end of alarm.
 In the menus bar, select Tools > Preferences : the Preferences screen is displayed.
 In this screen, select the Sounds tab.

Figure 7.4 : Window Preferences / Sounds

 Activate the sounds (the case No sound is not ticked) and if required the repetitions (the case
No repetition is not ticked).
 In the sound definition area, give the configuration (file.wav) for each event type (On Occurrence),
for the associated repetition (For Repetition) and the time between two repetitions :


New critical alarm and repetition

New major alarm and repetition

New minor alarm and repetition

New warning alarm and repetition

New inaccessible alarm and repetition

End of critical alarm

End of major alarm

End of minor alarm

End of warning alarm

End of inaccesible alarm

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


Page 196/236
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited

PREFERENCES MANAGEMENT
 Use [Browse] to select a new file.
 Use [Clear] to delete the configuration of selected line.
 Click [OK] when you have finished.
Notes :

The configuration sounds is defined for each client.


By default, the sounds are not activated.
The sound for repetition is done only for the event type of more important
severity (inacc > critical > major > minor > warning)

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
Page 197/236

USERS MANAGEMENT

8. USERS MANAGEMENT
8.1 - INTRODUCTION
User administration is now performed using the Admin View window.
This window enables :


creation of new profiles, new groups and new users.

operations on the profiles (add, delete, copy/cut, display and modify properties).

operations on the groups (add, delete, copy/cut, display and modify properties).

operations on the users (add, delete, copy/cut, display and modify properties).

listing the network domains and their associated groups.

8.2 - ADMIN VIEW WINDOW


The Admin View window has two parts:


a search area (left) with 4 tabs : Research tree, Users, Groups, Profiles.

a details area (on the right).

Figure 8.1 : Window Admin View / Research tree

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


Page 198/236
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited

USERS MANAGEMENT

Figure 8.2 : Window Admin View / Users

Figure 8.3 : Window Admin View / Groups

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
Page 199/236

USERS MANAGEMENT

Figure 8.4 : Window Admin View / Profiles

8.2.1 - To create a profile


This procedure is used to create a profile.
In the Admin View tools bar, click the New icon (left): the drop-down menu is displayed with three
options: Profile, Group and User.
In this menu, click [Profile] : the Profile creation window (1) is displayed.

Figure 8.5 : Window Profile creation (1)

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


Page 200/236
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited

USERS MANAGEMENT
Enter the profile name in the Profile name field.
Enter the profile description in the Profile description field.
Click [Next] to continue: the functions accessible to the profile are displayed.

Figure 8.6 : Window Profile creation (2)


Modify the functions accessible to the profile .
Click [Next] to continue: the customized data entry window is displayed.

Figure 8.7 : Window Profile creation (3)

Enter :
a/ the customer name in the Customer name field (40 characters max.)
b/ the location in the Location field (40 characters max.)
c/ any other necessary information in the Info field (200 characters max.).
IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
Page 201/236

USERS MANAGEMENT
Click [Finish] when you have finished, to validate the creation.
Note:

Two types of profiles can be defined:


- type provider access: the user will be able to only visualize all the
network with animation of his domain (see Figure 8.8) or of all the network
(to activate menu View/View all alarms).
- Type No provider access: the user will be able to visualize only his
domain.

Figure 8.8 : Window Topology View / Profile provider access


-

Note:
Three profiles are created by default:
Admin: with all the rights
- Operator: with all the rights except the administration
- Observer: with rights in reading only.

8.2.2 - To create a group


This procedure is used to create a group of users.
In the Admin View tools bar, click the New icon (left): the drop-down menu is displayed with three
options: Profile, Group and User.
In this menu, click [Group] : the Group creation window (1) is displayed.

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


Page 202/236
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited

USERS MANAGEMENT

Figure 8.9 : Window Group creation (1)


Enter the group name in the Group name field.
Enter the group description in the Group description field.
In the Profile name field, select a profile from the list proposed.
Click [Browse] to select the domain accessible to the group of users.
Notes :

A domain corresponds to a sub-network (with all the sub-networks contained


in it).
A user in a group can only display the trails belonging to its domain or those
crossing it.

Click [Next] to continue: the customized data entry window is displayed.

Figure 8.10 : Window Group creation (2)


Enter :
a/ the customer name in the Customer name field (40 characters max.),
b/ the location in the Location field (40 characters max.),
c/ any necessary additional information in the Info field (200 characters max.).
Click [Finish] when you have finished.

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
Page 203/236

USERS MANAGEMENT
8.2.3 - To create a user
This procedure is used to create a user.

LDAP users must be defined in the LDAP Directory Service before to


defined in IONOS-NMS

Caution :

In the Admin View tools bar, click the New icon (left): the drop-down menu is displayed with three
options: Profile, Group and User.
In this menu, click [User] : the User creation window (1) is displayed.

Figure 8.11 : Window User creation (1)

Figure 8.12 : Window LDAP User creation (1)

Caution : If the connection to a LDAP server is enabled (see 1.2.3.25 -), the check box LDAP
user is ticked. The user should be defined in the LDAP Directory Service.

Enter the user name in the User name field, then select a Group in the list proposed. The domain
used by this group is displayed.
Caution : If the connection to a LDAP server is enabled (see 1.2.3.25 -), the LDAP user should
be created using the Name of the user defined in the LDAP Directory Service (for

example olivier.dupont . The maximun length of the name depends of


your LDAP directory)
Click [Next] to continue: the password entry window is displayed.

Figure 8.13 : Window User creation (2)


IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05
Page 204/236
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited

USERS MANAGEMENT
In the Password and Confirm password fields, enter the user password then click [Next] : the
data entry window is displayed.
Caution : If the connection to a LDAP server is enabled (see 1.2.3.25 -), the password could be
not changed.

Figure 8.14 : Window User creation (3)


Enter :
a/ the customer name in the Customer name field (40 characters max.),
b/ the location in the Location field (40 characters max.),
c/ any necessary additional information in the Info field (200 characters max.).
Click [Finish] when you have finished.

8.2.4 - To display/modify the properties of a profile


This procedure is used to display/modify the properties of a profile.
Display the Admin View by clicking View > Admin View.
In the search window, select the Profiles tab.
In the list, select the profile then activate the Properties menu: the profile data are displayed in 3 tabs in
the right window: Definition, Authorization and Additional information.

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
Page 205/236

USERS MANAGEMENT

Figure 8.15 : Window Admin View / Profiles / Definition

If necessary, modify the profile name and the profile description (Definition tab).

Figure 8.16 : Window Admin View / Profiles / Authorization


If necessary, modify the functions accessible to the profile (Authorization tab).
If necessary, modify the additional data (Additional information tab).
Click [Apply] to validate the changes.

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


Page 206/236
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited

USERS MANAGEMENT
8.2.5 - To display/modify the properties of a group
This procedure is used to display and modify the properties of a group.
Display the Admin View window by clicking View > Admin View.
In the search window, select the Groups tab.
n the list, select the group then activate the Properties menu: the group data are displayed in 2 tabs to
the right: Definition, Additional information.

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
Page 207/236

USERS MANAGEMENT

Figure 8.17 : Window Admin View / Groups / Definition

If necessary, modify the group name, the profile and the domain (Definition tab).

Figure 8.18 : Window Admin View / Groups / Additional information

If necessary, modify the customized data (Additional information tab).


Click [Apply] to validate the data changes.

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


Page 208/236
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited

USERS MANAGEMENT

8.2.6 - To display/modify the properties of a user


This procedure is used to display and modify the properties of a user (not Ldap).
Display the Admin View window by clicking View > Admin View.
In the search window, select the Users tab.
In the list, select the user then activate the Properties menu: the user data is displayed in three tabs on
the right: Definition, Password, Additional information.

Figure 8.19 : Window Admin View / Users / Definition


If necessary, modify the user name in the User name field except for Ldap user .

Figure 8.20 : Window Admin View / Ldap Users / Definition

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
Page 209/236

USERS MANAGEMENT

Figure 8.21 : Window Admin View / Users / Password


If necessary, modify the password in the Password field except for Ldap user (Password tab).

Figure 8.22 : Window Admin View / Users / Additional information


If necessary, modify the additional data (Additional information tab).
Click [Apply] to validate the changes.

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


Page 210/236
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited

USERS MANAGEMENT
8.2.7 - To copy a profile
Display the Admin View by clicking View > Admin View.
In the search window, select the Profiles tab.
In the list, select the profile which you want to copy.
In the menus bar, click Edit > Copy/Paste : the following Profile creation window is displayed.

Figure 8.23 : Window Profile creation (1)


In the Profile name field, enter a new name for the profile and modify the description if necessary
Click [Next] to continue: the functions accessible to the profile are displayed.

Figure 8.24 : Window Profile creation (2)


Modify the functions accessible to the profile, if necessary.
Click [Next] to continue: the customized data entry window is displayed.

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
Page 211/236

USERS MANAGEMENT

Figure 8.25 : Window Profile creation (3)


Enter the customer name in the Customer name field (40 characters max.); enter the location in the
Location field (40 characters max.); enter any other necessary information in the Info field
(200 characters max.).
Click [Finish] when you have finished : the new profile appears in the list of profiles.

8.2.8 - To copy a group


Display the Admin View by clicking View > Admin View.
In the search window, select the Groups tab.
In the list, select the group which you want to copy.
In the menus bar, click Edit > Copy/Paste : the following Group creation window is displayed.

Figure 8.26 : Window Group creation (1)


In the Group name field, enter a new name for the group.
Select a new profile and a new domain if necessary.
Click [Next] to continue: the customized data entry window is displayed.

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


Page 212/236
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited

USERS MANAGEMENT

Figure 8.27 : Window Group creation (2)


Enter the customer name in the Customer name field (40 characters max.); enter the location in the
Location field (40 characters max.); enter any other necessary information in the Info field
(200 characters max.).
Click [Finish] when you have finished : the new group appears in the list of groups.

8.2.9 - To copy a user


Display the Admin View by clicking View > Admin View.
In the search window, select the Users tab.
In the list, select the user which you want to copy.

Figure 8.28 : Window Admin View / Users / Definition


In the menus bar, click Edit > Copy/Paste : the User creation window is displayed.

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
Page 213/236

USERS MANAGEMENT

Figure 8.29 : Window User creation (1)


Enter a new user name in the User name field.
Select a new group if necessary.
Click [Next] to continue: the password entry window is displayed.

Figure 8.30 : Window User creation (2)


In the Password and Confirm password fields, enter the user password then click [Next] : the
data entry window is displayed.

Figure 8.31 : Window User creation (3)

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


Page 214/236
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited

USERS MANAGEMENT
Enter :
a/ the customer name in the Customer name field (40 characters max.),
b/ the location in the Location field (40 characters max.),
c/ any other necessary information in the Info field (200 characters max.).
Click [Finish] when you have finished : the new user appears in the list of users.

8.2.10 - To delete a profile


Display the Admin View by clicking View > Admin View.
In the search window, select the Profiles tab.
In the list, select the profile which you want to delete.
In the menus bar, click Edit > Delete : a confirmation message is displayed.
Click [Yes] to validate the deletion.

8.2.11 - To delete a group


Display the Admin View by clicking View > Admin View.
In the search window, select the Groups tab.
In the list, select the group which you want to delete.
In the menus bar, click Edit > Delete : a confirmation message is displayed.
Click [Yes] to validate the deletion.

8.2.12 - To delete a user

Display the Admin View by clicking View > Admin View.


In the search window, select the Users tab.
In the list, select the user which you want to delete.
In the menus bar, click Edit > Delete : a confirmation message is displayed.
Click [Yes] to validate the deletion.

8.2.13 - To lock a user


Display the Admin View by clicking View > Admin View.
In the search window, select the Users tab.
In the list, select the user you want to lock and click on the Definition tab.

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
Page 215/236

USERS MANAGEMENT

Figure 8.32 : Window Admin View / Users / Definition

In the LockState field, select the lock value from the list
Do [Apply] : the user s is locked. LockReason is FORCED.
Notes:

Only users with admin profile can lock a user


Users created with default profile admin and default users can not be
locked
A user locked can not open a session

8.2.14 - To unlock a user


Display the Admin View by clicking View > Admin View.
In the search window, select the Users tab.
In the list, select the user you want to unlock and click on the Definition tab.

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


Page 216/236
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited

USERS MANAGEMENT

Figure 8.33 : Window Admin View / Users / Definition

In the LockState field, select the unlock value from the list
Do [Apply] : the user is unlocked.

Note:

Only users with admin profile can unlock a user

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
Page 217/236

IONOS SERVERS FEDERATOR

9. IONOS SERVERS FEDERATOR


9.1 - INTRODUCTION
The Ionos Federator enables supervision of alarms for multiple Ionos-NMS servers via IP network and checks
servers accessibility by a configurable polling mechanism.
This application enables :


the visualization of each server on the map (represented by an icon)

the alarm state visualization of each server (animation of color)

the alarms list visualization of each server

the start of a client on each server

In the case of backup 1+1 of IONOS NMS servers, the Ionos Federator allows to :


to activate switching from main server to backup server

To activate conversely switching from backup server to main server


Note :

In case of ADR10000 management, you have to do some manually operations:


to start/stop the EMS-ADR server and restore the EMS-ADR database.

Refer to the EMS-ADR User Manual version 7 N 253 216 157-A or EMS-ADR User Manual version 8.1 N
253 359 465-A to start/stop the EMS-ADR server and to restore the EMS-ADR database.

9.2 - DESCRIPTION OF IONOS SERVERS FEDERATOR


9.2.1 - The map of Federator

Figure 9.1 : Window Ionos Federator


IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05
Page 218/236
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited

IONOS SERVERS FEDERATOR


Each server defined in the configuration file is represented by an icon on the map. Each icon is colored.
If the server is connected to Federator, the color of icon corresponds to the maximum level of severity of the
alarms which the server contains.
The color of background icon corresponds to the maximum level of severity of the alarms not acknowledged
which the server contains.
The color of edge icon corresponds to the maximum level of the all alarms (acknowledged and not
acknowledged) which the server contains.
The animations are the following :


no alarm on network elements which the server contains (or warning alarm) : green

minor alarm on one of network elements which the server contains : yellow

major alarm on one of network elements which the server contains : red

critical alarm on one of network elements which the server contains : pink

inaccessibilty alarm on one of network elements which the server contains : blue

The server icon has the color of NE which contains the alarm of highest severity level.
The map is refreshed all the n seconds (n = value of PoolRefreshValue in the configuration file).
When the connection between the server and the Federator failed, the icon is blue with the cause of failure:


Unreacheable : the server is inaccessible

Unompatible : the version number of server is not compatible with the version number of
Federator

Unknown user : the login has failed with the user name and password enterd in the window
login of Federator

When the server is not connected with the Federator, the Federator tries a connection all the m seconds (m =
value of PoolReconnectValue in the configuration file).

9.2.2 - To visualize the alarms of a server


This procedure is used to visualize all the alarms (alarms of type EMS and NMS) which a server contains.
 In the map, click right on the server to be displayed.
 In the pop-up menu, select Faults : the Ionos Federator / Alarms window is displayed.

Figure 9.2 : Window Ionos Federator / Alarms

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
Page 219/236

IONOS SERVERS FEDERATOR


In the table, each line takes the color corresponding to the level of severity of the alarm which it contains :


gray : warning.

yellow : for a minor alarm.

red : for a major alarm

pink : for a critical alarm

blue : for inaccessibility alarm

The alarms are displayed in accordance with the selection in increasing alphabetical order () or decreasing
alphabetical order () (Begin represents the default sorts) with the following parameters :


Equipment : equipment name.

Location : card and port, cause of alarm.

Event type : type of alarm.

Status : level of severity of alarm.

Ack : indicates if alarm has been acknowledged (yes or no)

Begin date : date on which alarm was received by manager.

NE date : date at which alarm was sent by NE.

9.2.3 - To filter current alarms of a server by criteria


This procedure is used to filter the alarms which you want to display.
 Click right to bring up the pop-up menu.
 In this menu, select [List] : a new pop-up menu is displayed.

Figure 9.3 : Window Ionos Federator / Alarms / List

 Select [Save as] to export the list of alarms in a file.


 Select [Print] to print the list of alarms.
 Select [Customize] : the List configuration window is displayed (1) (2) .

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


Page 220/236
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited

IONOS SERVERS FEDERATOR

Figure 9.4 : Window Ionos Federaor / List configuration

 Check [Filters] and give all the criteria to be applied for the alarms filtering.
 Click on [Apply] to validate the operation : the alarms corresponding to the filtering criteria defined
are displayed in the alarms table.
 In the menu, click on the button [Enable filters] to activate or deactivate the filter.
Notes :

(1)Use Automatic column resize to modify the size of displayed columns.


(2) Use visible columns to choose the columns displayed in the list.

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
Page 221/236

IONOS SERVERS FEDERATOR

9.2.4 - To open a IONOS-NMS Client on a server


This procedure is used to open a Client application on one of servers managed by the Federator.
 In the map, click right on the server IONOS-NMS.
 In the pop-up menu, select [Open client) : a Client is launched on this server , with the user name
and the password entered on the window Login of Federator when the Federator has been
launched.The main view of Client is displayed.

9.2.5 - To open a IONOS-NMS Client on a server with another user


This procedure is used to open a Client application on one of servers managed by the Federator, with another
user name and password.
 In the map, click right on the server IONOS-NMS.
 In the pop-up menu, select [Open client with another user] : a client is launched on this server. The
window login is displayed to enter the new user name and the password.

Figure 9.5 : Window Ionos Federator / Login on Client

 In this window, enter the user name (User name field) and the password (Password field) : by
default, the passwords corresponding to the default users admin, operator et observer are
respectively secret, private et public.
 Click [OK] to validate the window : the main view of Client is displayed.
Notes :

The user profile defines the user rights on the Application :


. The administrator has all rights.
. The operator has all rights except the rights on the Admin view.
. The observer can only consult the application.
Refer to the table in Appendix : Rights linked to each profile created by
default.

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


Page 222/236
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited

IONOS SERVERS FEDERATOR

9.2.6 - To force the connection of a server not connected


The connection between the Federator and a server which is not connected is launched all the m seconds
(m = value defined in the configuration file).
This procedure is used to force the connection of Federator with a server which is not connected.
 In the map, click right on the server IONOS-NMS which is not connected.
 In the pop-up menu, select [Force re-connection] : if the connection failed, an error message is
displayed (Connection failure).

9.2.7 - To force the refresh of the map


On the map, the refresh of the alarm state is done all the n seconds (n value defined in the configuration file)
for all the servers which are connected.
This procedure is used to force the refresh of the map for all the servers which are connected with the
Federator.
 In the map, click right on the server connected IONOS-NMS
 In this menu, select [Refresh servers].

9.2.8 - To start a server


This procedure is used to start a server which is stopped. The application Easy Launcher must be launched
on the machine on which the server is started.
 In the map, click right the server IONOS-NMS.
 In the pop-up menu, select [Start Server].
Note :

In case of ADR10000 management, you have to start manually the EMS-ADR


associated to the Ionos-NMS server.

Refer to the EMS-ADR User Manual version 7 N 253 216 157-A or EMS-ADR User Manual version
8.1 N 253 359 465-A to start/stop the EMS-ADR server and to restore the EMS-ADR database

9.2.9 - To stop a server


This procedure is used to start a server which is stopped. The application Easy Launcher must be launched
on the machine on which the server is stopped.
 In the map, click right the server IONOS-NMS.
 In the pop-up menu, select [Stop Server].
Note :

In case of ADR10000 management, you have to stop manually the EMS-ADR


associated to the Ionos-NMS server.

Refer to the EMS-ADR User Manual version 7 N 253 216 157-A or EMS-ADR User Manual version
8.1 N 253 359 465-A to start/stop the EMS-ADR server and to restore the EMS-ADR database

9.2.10 - To backup the database of a server


This procedure is used to backup the database of a server which is not stopped.
 In the map, click right the server IONOS-NMS.
IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
Page 223/236

IONOS SERVERS FEDERATOR


 In the pop-up menu, select [Backup Server].
The user must have the rights to perform this action (see 1.2.3.38 -To configure the user rights to perform
actions from the Federator application).
Note :

In case of ADR10000 management, an EMS-ADR database backup will be done


on the EMS-ADR backup server associated to the Ionos-NMS server.

In the case of backup 1+1, a backup of Ionos-NMS and EMS-ADR databases will be done on the backup
servers via FTP or SFTP protocol.

9.2.11 - To Restore the database on a server


This procedure is used to restore the last backup of database on a server The server must be stopped.
 In the map, click right the server IONOS-NMS.
 In the pop-up menu, select [Restore from last backup].
The user must have the rights to perform this action (see 1.2.3.38 -To configure the user rights to perform
actions from the Federator application).
Note :

In case of ADR10000 management, you have to restore manually the EMS-ADR


database.

Refer to the EMS-ADR User Manual version 7 N 253 216 157-A or EMS-ADR User Manual version 8.1 N
253 359 465-A to restore the EMS-ADR database.

9.2.12 - To Change a server


This procedure is used to change a server by another server. In the case of backup 1+1 of IONOS NMS
servers, this menu is used to replace a principal server by a backup server.
 In the map, click right the server IONOS-NMS.
 In the pop-up menu, select [Change server].
The user must have the rights to perform this action (see 1.2.3.38 -To configure the user rights to perform
actions from the Federator application).
Note :

In case of ADR10000 management, you have to do some manually operations:


to start/stop the EMS-ADR server and restore the EMS-ADR database.

9.2.13 - Backup 1+1 of IONOS NMS servers (Option)


Caution : This function requires a specific license. It is not provided with the basic version of
IONOS-NMS.
9.2.13.1 - Introduction

Backup 1+1 of IONOS-NMS servers feature aims at making n IONOS-NMS server machines secure thanks to
an additional one able to run IONOS-NMS in case of main one has collapsed.
Switching from principal IONOS-NMS server to backup IONOS-NMS server is done by human action. No
automatic switching will be implemented, also about the switching from principal EMS-ADR to backup EMSADR.
Backup 1+1 is based on :
IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05
Page 224/236
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited

IONOS SERVERS FEDERATOR


- A Federator application.
- An Oracle database per server (main / backup) running permanently on all servers.
- n IONOS-NMS servers (1 main / 1 backup). IONOS-NMS servers run without interruption, but the backup
server is not launched if the main server runs. One of them must be in standby mode. If not, the backup is not
possible.
- An Easy Launcher application per server (main / backup); running at any time on each NMS server. It allows
to launch on the backup server periodic backups of databases od fifferent main servers and It controls all
steps of switching main server to backup server.
- A FTP or SFTP server per machine, running permanently. It enables to receive periodical backup performed
by the twin NMS server when it runs.
- Protection of servers does not concern the proxy that must be protected independently.
Note :

In case of ADR10000 management, you have to do some manually operations:


to start/stop the EMS-ADR server and restore the EMS-ADR database.
Also, if the ssh protocol is used, it can be necessary to configure the username
and password of the SFTP server on the EMS-ADR server. (see 1.2.3.30 - To
configure ssh protocol with EMS-ADR (ADR10000).

9.2.13.2 - Procedure of backup

First, you have to configure the main and backup servers using the secureUpdate.sh script and answer to the
questions.
Note :

In case of ADR10000 management, you have to enter the IP address of EMSADR and the path of backup in EMS-ADR: /sdh_home/ems/ENMConfig (by
default)

Then, you have to configure the Federator application using the configurationFederator.vbs script and answer
to the questions
Note:
In case of ADR10000 management, you have to confirm if a EMS-ADR exists
and to enter the IP address of the associated EMS-ADR.
Each server main is described in the file Federator.xml (folder Config) with a type principal.
The server of backup is described in the file Federator.xml (folder Config) with a type backup.
The backup server is stopped.
The icons of all servers of type main are displayed on the map of Federator.
The icon of backup server is displayed on the map of Federator. It is colored in blue, because the server is
unreacheable (stopped).
On each server main, a scheduled task is defined to launch automatically and regularly a backup of
database on the server main and on the server backup via FTP.
In case of ADR10000 management, a backup of EMS-ADR is also done.

On each server main, the applications Easy Launcher, FTP or SFTP, and IONOS-NMS server have been
launched.
On the server backup, the applications Easy Launcher and FTP or SFTP have been launched, but the
server IONOS-NMS is stopped.
From Federator, launch the menu [Change server] on the server main.
Note : A dialog box is displayed for each step (to launch, abort or continue the actions, and to inform).
Case 1 : the server main is running.

 A backup of databse is done on the server main and sent on the server backup via FTP.
 The server main is stopped.
 The last backup of database of main server is restored on server backup.
IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
Page 225/236

IONOS SERVERS FEDERATOR


 The server backup is started.
 A client can be started on the server backup. The map is identical.
Case 2 : the server main is stopped.

 The last backup of database of main server is restored on the server backup.
 The server backup is started.
 A client can be started on the server backup. The map is updated.
Notes :

The table of traps is updated with the IP address of backup server. The IP
address of main server is removed from the table. This update is not done for
equipment of type ADR155C P2.6, and for all equipment inaccessible or in
session locked.

Notes : In the following drawing the word FTP can be replaced by SFTP according your
configuration

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


Page 226/236
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited

IONOS SERVERS FEDERATOR

Main server use


Server 1

Client PC

Easy
Launcher

NMS
Server

Federator

Oracle

FTP
server

Backup Server (alive or stopped)


Easy
Launcher

...
Server n

NMS
Server
(stopped)

FTP
server

Easy
Launcher

NMS
Server

Oracle
content
not used

Oracle

FTP
server

Backup server use


Server 1

Client PC

Easy
Launcher

NMS
Server

Federator

Oracle

FTP
server

Backup Server

...

Easy
Launcher

Server i (alive or stopped)


Easy
Launcher

NMS
Server
(stopped)

FTP
server

NMS
Server

Oracle

NMS
Server

Oracle

FTP
server

Oracle

database
server i

content
not used

...

Changing server main <->backup


Client PC
Federator

Server origin (alive or stopped)


Easy
Launcher
FTP
server

NMS
Server

Server destination
Oracle

Easy
Launcher
FTP
server

(stopped)

empty
database

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
Page 227/236

APPENDIX - SPECIAL FUNCTIONS UPON OBJECTS

APPENDIX - SPECIAL FUNCTIONS UPON OBJECTS


Object

Functions

Menus

Sub-network

Copy
Cut
Delete
Paste
Properties Read / Write
Rename
New Sub-Network

Edit

Creation

Network element (NE)

Copy
Cut
Delete
Paste
Rename
New NE
Audit/Inventory
NE to NMS aligns
Audit/NMS to NE
parameters reapplication
Audit/NMS to NE
parameters reactivation
Equipment View
Force Polling
NE database backup
NE database restoration
NE extraction
Export XML
SNMP View
Software Management
NE Discovering

Edit

Creation

Action

Tools

Links SDH

Delete
Rename
Properties Read / Write
Switch MSP
New STM-n Link
Activate MSP
Add MSP
De-Activate MSP
Delete MSP
Dissociate MSP
NE extraction
NE insertion
Export XML
Show Links
RS Path trace configuration

Edit
Edit / Properties
Creation

Action

Links Ethernet

Delete
Properties Read / Write
IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05
Page 228/236
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited

Edit

APPENDIX - SPECIAL FUNCTIONS UPON OBJECTS


Object

Functions

New Ethernet Link


Activate
De-Activate
Dissociate
Show Links

Menus

Creation
Action

Links WDM

Delete
Properties Read
New WDM Link
Activate
De-Activate
Dissociate
Show Links

Edit
Creation
Action

Trails SDH

Delete
Properties Read / Write
Switch SNC
New Trail
Activate
De-Activate
Dissociate
Split / Merge
Protection activation
Protection de-activation
Export XML
Enable Real Time
Supervision
Disable Real Time
Supervision

Edit
Edit / Properties
Creation

Action

VCGRoup

Delete
Properties Read/Write
New VCGroup
Activate
De-Activate
Dissociate

Edit
Creation
Action

Ethernet Services

Delete
Properties Read /Write
New Ethernet Service
Activate
De-Activate
Dissociate

Edit
Creation
Action

Trails WDM

Delete
Properties Read /Write
New WDM Trail

Edit
Creation

Activate
De-Activate

Action

Dissociate

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
Page 229/236

APPENDIX - SPECIAL FUNCTIONS UPON OBJECTS


Object

Functions

Menus

MS-Spring

Delete
Properties Read / Write
Switch MS-SPRing
New Ring
Activate
De-Activate
Dissociate

Edit
Edit / Properties
Creation
Action

Alarms

Properties Read
Propagation
Clear
Acknowledge
Export
Unacknowledge

Edit
Edit/Properties

Properties Read

Edit

Change password

File

Forced backup

File

Tool-bar

Performances
Users
Applications
Administration

User

Groups

Profiles

New user
Copy / Paste
Delete
Properties
New groups
Copy / Paste
Delete
Properties
New profiles
Copy/Paste
Delete
Properties

Creation

Preferences

Tools

Edit
Creation
Edit
Creation
Edit

Preferences

Note : Whatever the object (Sub-network, NE, STM-Link, etc.), the Tools menu
presents the same functions : preferences and software management.

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


Page 230/236
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited

APPENDIX Example of split/merge scenario

APPENDIX Example of split/merge scenario


See Below, the procedure (on Windows O.S.) to be implemented to achieve the following scenario:
Alpha server divides its database in AP and AS sub-networks.
Original database (NMSSERVER):
Main View
/
\
Sub_AP
Sub_AS
Result database 1 :
Main View
|
Sub_AP
Result database 2 :
Main View
|
Sub_AS
The AP database is transferred to the Beta server where is the B database
We merge of AP and B databases to get a BP database
Procedure on the Alpha server :
 Stop the Alpha server.
 Check if the free space of Oracle database is sufficient (the space required must be at least equal
to twice of the initial database.
1- Run the split [parameters] script from the IONOS-NMS/bin/SplitMerge folder:
> split.bat DBNMS NMSSERVER nmssmn NMSSERVER _AP NMSSERVER_ AS Sub_AP
 Two new additional users are created : NMSSERVER _AP and NMSSERVER_ AS
 The NMSERVER_AP user contains the SUP_AP subnetwork (with nmssmn password)
 The NMSERVER_AS user contains the SUP_AS subnetwork (with nmssmn password)
2- Perform an export of database (NMSSERVER _AP) to be transferred.
 Update the Ionos-NMS/config/oracle_ext_assembly.xml file:
Replace NMSSERVER by NMSSERVER _AP
 Run the export script from the IONOS-NMS/bin folder :
> export.bat fileAP.dat
 Copy the fileAP.dat file from the Alpha server to the Beta server into the Ionos-NMS/bin folder:
3- Update the Ionos-NMS/config/oracle_ext_assembly.xml file:
Replace NMSSERVER_AP by NMSSERVER _AS
There are two possibilities :
 Start the IONOS-NMS server with the NMSSERVER _AS user

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
Page 231/236

APPENDIX Example of split/merge scenario


Or (in order to keep the NMSSERVER user )
 Perform an export of the NMSSERVER _AS database
From the Ionos-NMS/bin folder run the command :
> export.bat fileAS.dat
 Update the Ionos-NMS/config/oracle_ext_assembly.xml file:
Replace NMSSERVER_AS by NMSSERVER
 Perform an import of database:
From the Ionos-NMS/bin folder run the command:
> import.bat fileAS.dat
 Start the IONOS-NMS server with the NMSSERVER user
Procedure on the Beta server :
 Stop the Beta server.
 Check if the free space of Oracle database is sufficient (the space required must be at least equal
to the sum of the both databases to merge)
1- Create a new Oracle user : NMSSERVER_AP (with nmssmn password)
2- Perform an import of NMSSERVER _AP database :
 Update the Ionos-NMS/config/oracle_ext_assembly.xml file:
Replace NMSSERVER by NMSSERVER_AP
 Perform an import of database:
From the Ionos-NMS/bin folder run the command:
> import.bat fileAP.dat
3- Perform the merge of the both databases:
 Run the merge [parameters] script from the IONOS-NMS/bin/SplitMerge folder:
> merge.bat DBNMS NMSSERVER _AP nmssmn NMSSERVER nmssmn NMSSERVER_MERGE
(in order to keep the IONOS-NMS Preferences of the NMSSRVER_AP user )
or
> merge.bat DBNMS NMSSERVER nmssmn NMSSERVER_AP nmssmn NMSSERVER_MERGE
(in order to keep the IONOS-NMS Preferences of the NMSSRVER user )
 A new user NMSSERVER_MERGE is created in Oracle database
4- Update the Ionos-NMS/config/oracle_ext_assembly.xml file:
Replace NMSSERVER_AP by NMSSERVER_MERGE

There are two possibilities to start the IONOS-NMS server:


 Start the IONOS-NMS server with the NMSSERVER _MERGE user

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


Page 232/236
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited

APPENDIX Example of split/merge scenario


Or (in order to keep the NMSSERVER user )
 Perform an export of the NMSSERVER _MERGE database
From the Ionos-NMS/bin folder run the command :
> export.bat fileMERGE.dat
 Update the Ionos-NMS/config/oracle_ext_assembly.xml file:
Replace NMSSERVER_MERGE by NMSSERVER
 Perform an import of database:
From the Ionos-NMS/bin folder run the command:
> import.bat fileMERGE.dat
 Start the IONOS-NMS server with the NMSSERVER user
5- Updating the traps managers table of the Network Elements
 Check the Beta server is started.
 From the IONOS-NMS\bin folder run the command:
> run.bat ./bsh/trapreceiverupdate.bsh
Enter the previous unused IP address of the Alpha server and the newer IP address of the Beta
server.

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
Page 233/236

APPENDIX Example of SNMP trap generator configuration

APPENDIX Example of SNMP trap generator configuration


See Below, an example of generation.xml file:
<generation>
<netype>
<Type value="ADR155C"/>
<!--Type value="ADR622"/-->
<Type value="ADR2500Extra"/>
</netype>
<distant>
<IpAddress value="10.0.0.1/163"/>
<IpAddress value="10.0.0.2/164"/>
</distant>
<filter-alarm>
<filter nename="Dijon"/>
<filter nename="Paris"/>
<filter status="critical"/>
<filter status="major"/>
<filter status="minor"/>
<filter eventtype="los"/>
<filter eventtype="ais"/>
<filter eventtype="defect"/>
<filter location="PPI" match="begin"/>
<filter location="BOARD" match="begin"/>
<filter location="TRIB 8 VCG#3" match="exact"/>
<filter nedatebegin="2009-10-01 05:00:00" nedateend="2009-12-31 09:00:00"/>
<filter nedatebegin="2010-01-02 05:00:00" nedateend="2010-03-31 09:00:00"/>
<filter nmsdatebegin="2009-10-01 05:00:00" nmsdateend="2010-03-31 09:00:00"/>
</filter-alarm>
<filter-event>
<filter nename="Paris"/>
<filter nename="Lyon"/>
<filter eventtype="Login"/>
<filter location="" match="begin"/>
<filter location="SESSION" match="exact"/>
<filter nmsdatebegin="2009-12-31 05:00:00" nmsdateend="2010-03-31 09:00:00"/>
</filter-event>
</generation>

Interpretation of the different filtering criterias:


<generation>
<netype>
<Type value="ADR155C"/>
<!--Type value="ADR622"/-->
<Type value="ADR2500Extra"/>
</netype>
<distant>
<IpAddress value="10.0.0.1/163"/>
<IpAddress value="10.0.0.2/164"/>
</distant>
<filter-alarm>
<filter nename="Dijon"/>
OR
<filter nename="Paris"/>
AND
<filter status="critical"/>
OR
IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05
Page 234/236
SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited

<filter status="major"/>
OR
<filter status="minor"/>
AND
<filter eventtype="los"/>
OR
<filter eventtype="ais"/>
OR
<filter eventtype="defect"/>
AND
<filter location="PPI" match="begin"/>
OR
<filter location="BOARD" match="begin"/>
OR
<filter location="TRIB" match="exact"/>
AND
<filter nedatebegin="2009-10-01 05:00:00" nedateend="2009-12-31 09:00:00"/>
OR
<filter nedatebegin="2010-01-02 05:00:00" nedateend="2010-03-31 09:00:00"/>
AND
<filter nmsdatebegin="2009-10-01 05:00:00" nmsdateend="2010-03-31 09:00:00"/>
</filter-alarm>
<filter-event>
<filter nename="Paris"/>
OR
<filter nename="Lyon"/>
AND
<filter eventtype="Login"/>
AND
<filter location="" match="begin"/>
OR
<filter location="SESSION" match="exact"/>
AND
<filter nmsdatebegin="2009-12-31 05:00:00" nmsdateend="2010-03-31 09:00:00"/>
</filter-event>
</generation>

IONOS-NMS P5 METERING Installation and User Guide 253 153 970-05


SAGEMCOM document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited
Page 235/236

SAGEMCOM SAS
Headquarters : 250, route de lEmpereur
92500 Rueil-Malmaison France
www.sagemcom.com
All rights reserved. The information and specifications included are subject to change without prior notice. Sagem Communications SAS tries to ensure that all information in this
document is correct, but does not accept liability for error or omission. Non contractual document. All trademarks are registered by their respective owners. Simplified joint stock
company - Capital 158.291.895 Euro - 440 294 510 RCS Paris

Das könnte Ihnen auch gefallen